JP6690678B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a main control device and a sub-control device that controls a game according to a control signal from the main control device are provided , and the sub-control device responds based on the content determined by the main control device. There has been proposed a method of executing the effect.

JP, 2006-198033, A

However, in such a gaming machine, when the power supply to the gaming machine is shut off, failure there is a possibility that occur.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems such as described above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine not condition may turn hard to occur if the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a specifying means for specifying a satisfaction condition, a storage means for storing information according to the satisfaction condition specified by the specifying means, and a memory for the storage means. and have use the information in accordance with the satisfied condition being a condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the predetermined condition is judged to be satisfied by the condition determining means, specific and demonstration execution means for executing effect, and updatable update unit the counter value, power supply is configured hardly the updated counter value is cleared in the blocked power interruption state, is also stored in the power interruption state and a holding memory means capable of storing information, are those having, when the voltage supplied to the Yu technique machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, the power failure determination to determine that it is the power interruption state Means and By the power interruption discriminating means on the basis that it is determined that the power interruption state, the first control means capable of controlling the so that information corresponding to the satisfied condition in the holding memory means is stored, the game based on that power is supplied to the machine, and a second control means capable of executing a specific control for controlling a so that predetermined information is stored in the storage means, and operator-operable operating means, the Operation determining means for determining the operation content of the operating means, the second control means, the operation between the power supply to the game machine until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied the determination result of the determining means based on the fact that a first determination result associated with a particular operation, the first specific information stored in the holding memory means controls the so that stored in said storage means Control and the specific hand And a second specific control for controlling information stored in the storage unit to be stored in accordance with the established condition newly specified by the specific control. Based on that the determination result of the operation determination means is different from the first determination result from the time when the power is supplied to the first determination condition is satisfied, the second determination result is determined. It is those that are configured to be able to execute control as the specific control, after which the specified condition is satisfied, that is configured to perform the specified control is suppressed.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, and is configured to be playable by using a predetermined gaming medium.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the specifying means for specifying the satisfaction condition, the storage means for storing information according to the satisfaction condition specified by the specifying means, and the satisfaction condition stored in the storage means and have use the response information, and the condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the predetermined condition is judged to be satisfied by the condition determining means, directing execution means for executing a specific effect When a renewable update unit the counter value, power supply is configured hardly cleared the updated counter value in the blocked power interruption state, capable of holding the information stored in the power interruption state holding storage means are those having, when the voltage supplied to the Yu technique machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, a power failure determining means for determining that said power interruption state, the interruption determination By means On the basis that it is judged that the serial power interruption state, the first control means capable of controlling the so that information is stored in accordance with the established condition to said holding memory means, power is supplied to said gaming machine based on the, second control means capable of executing a specific control for controlling a so that predetermined information is stored in the storage means, and operator-operable operating means, the operation content for the operating means An operation determination means for determining is provided, and the second control means determines that the determination result of the operation determination means is within a period from when power is supplied to the gaming machine until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. based on the fact that a first determination result associated with a particular operation, the first and the particular control, the specific means for information stored in the holding memory means controls the so that stored in said storage means Newly identified by The second specific control for controlling the information according to the satisfaction condition to be stored in the storage means is configured to be executable as the specific control, and power is supplied to the gaming machine. The second specific control is determined to be the specific control based on that the determination result of the operation determination unit is a determination result different from the first determination result from the time when the specific condition is satisfied until the determination is satisfied. It is those which are executable configured, after which the specified condition is satisfied, that is configured to perform the specified control is suppressed.

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to generate a non-degree when a power supply to the gaming machine has been shut off.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning type counter C2 and the special jackpot type. , (C) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which shows the production change table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a timing device. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the timing device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a time acquisition process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control procedure. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-rounds command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is an error command process executed by the MPU of the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the flowchart which showed the demonstration display processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the clock device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the timing device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time counter initialization process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the timing device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table of the timing device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter initial value setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the period information table of ROM in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the timing device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the table acquisition process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time confirmation process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notification time setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting | reporting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alerting command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the timing device in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table 1 in the register | resistor 1 of the timing device in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the register table 2 in the register | resistor 2 of the timing device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time acquisition process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the various production data setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the elapsed time confirmation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the backup processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side where the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage” → “empty stage” is performed. ”→“ Island stage ”→“ City stage ”→ ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. A display lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chrome is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not required in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer circumference of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear surfaces are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (where a winning opening or the like is provided, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol that is performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened, and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning port 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the big hit, on the game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered spheres is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved spheres is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. And is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types.

  "Big hit A" is a probability variation big hit that the maximum number of rounds goes to a high probability state of a special symbol after a big hit of 15 rounds, and "big hit B" is the maximum number of rounds after a big hit of 15 rounds. During the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) while shifting to a low probability state of the special symbol, it is a time saving jackpot that normally becomes a time saving state of the symbol.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot is finished, so-called when the probability of the special symbol is changing (during the change of the special symbol) In other words, it is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the probability is not changing, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability. Also, in the "special symbol low probability state", the normal symbol time saving state (time saving medium) is the jackpot probability in the normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the winning probability of the ordinary symbol increases. A game state in which a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is opened, or one hit The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is three times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state of special symbols) with few LEDs. Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with an attached pattern imitating a character such as planer, furoshiki, helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. In the case of "big hit A" that moves to a high probability state (probability change state) of a special symbol after the end of a big hit, a variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") with an odd number are arranged is presented and the big hit. In the case of "big hit B" which shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol after the end, a variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") to which an even number is added are arranged is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/3 on the upper side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small region Ds1 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small region Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is up to 4 times. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. The number may be set to the number below or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in a lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the ordinary symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is not limited to four times as in the case of the first entrance 64 and is not more than three times or five times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery for special symbols is made in the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (a big hit of 5 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 5 times (5 rounds). The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the open / close plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a during opening of the opening 65a. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps etc. adhered to the adhesive space K1 are front frames 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as the ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of ROM 202 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. At least the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 7B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 7 (c)) is a data table in which the hit determination value of a normal symbol is stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. Values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of being a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special It is divided into two types, that is, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Here, whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol is defined by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). Further, the first per random number table 202a, the first per random number table 202a (not shown) for low probability of special symbols, and the first per random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols (not shown) ) Are provided, and the type of the first random number table 202a is properly used according to whether the special symbol has a low probability or the special symbol has a high probability.

  In the first random number table 202a for low probability of special symbols, "7,307,582" is stored as three random number values which are the big hits of special symbols. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 900, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, in the first per random number table 202a for high probability of special symbols, as 30 random number values which are big hits of special symbols, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 900, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/30".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number that is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are jackpots are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is defined for each value of the first hit type counter C2 by the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Specifically, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 49" is "big hit A". Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and back" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage type depending on the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or in the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number values corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability times. Is selected, and it becomes easier to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "rearward / rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front / rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, so that it is difficult to select "rear / rear outreach" or "reach other than front / rear outreach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is a small probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front / rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “out-of-front / rear reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Has been.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection superreach", "disconnection" Various "special reach" are stipulated, various "common normal reach" types, "shared super-reach" types, "shared special reach" types are defined as variation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B. As variation patterns for jackpot A, Various "special reach" are stipulated and various "common normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, and "shared special reach" types are stipulated as variation patterns for common win / off. Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being performed and is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally wins the symbol is set by the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the per second random number counter C4. When the value coincides with the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second per random number table 202c, the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 7 (c)) for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period when the normal symbol is in the normal state), and the low probability thereof. It is divided into two types, the second per random number table 202c (see FIG. 7 (c)) for the high probability time (the period in which the normal symbol is in a time saving state) with a high probability of winning a normal symbol, and it is included in each. The number of winning random numbers is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the second random number table 202c for low probability of ordinary symbols, 24 random number values that are the symbols of ordinary symbols are stored, and the range is "5 to 28". It has become. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values to be a hit is 24, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, in the second random number table 202c for high probability of normal symbols, 200 random number values to be the regular symbols are stored, and the range is "5 to 204". In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 25). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 5, a special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a time saving. It has a counter 203e and a probability variation flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into holding areas having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, a hit, a stop type, a variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From this, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated).

  Then, the predicted various information is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the prize information command, and the voice lamp control device 113 uses the various information notified by the prize information command (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) as the prize information. The information is stored in the information storage area 223a.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for hitting a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to an initial value of zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 20). On the other hand, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 18).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 18, see S405 of FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is a variable display holding ball held by the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next reserved ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to hold, and the display hold device for notifying the number of balls to be held to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere count symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere count notified by the display reserved sphere count command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 of FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the sphere passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 of FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 on either the left or right, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the ordinary symbol holding sphere storage area 203b. No (S703: No in FIG. 21) is not performed.

  The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. That is, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203e has an initial value set to zero, and the main control device 110 performs a special symbol lottery, and 100 is set to the time saving medium counter 203e every time it is determined to be a "big hit B". It That is, when the "big hit B" is reached, 100 is newly set to the time saving medium counter 203e regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203e.

  When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0, based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for low probability time, the ordinary symbol is drawn (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The probability variation flag 203f is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203f is on, it indicates a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it indicates a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation flag 203f is turned on when a special symbol is drawn in the main control device 110 and is determined to be "big hit A", and is turned off when it is determined to be "big hit B" (S213 in FIG. 17). , S214).

  When the special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, it is referred to whether the probability change flag 203f is on or not. If it is on, the special symbol jackpot lottery based on the first hit type selection table 202b for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203f is off, the special symbol jackpot lottery is performed based on the first winning type selection table 202b for low probability.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). The display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display, is controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main controller 110, a display controller 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, a clock device 262, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  A change pattern table 222a (not shown) and an effect switching table 222b (see FIG. 8) are stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The fluctuation pattern table 222a is a table used for determining the mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the rough variation pattern modes such as “outside normal reach”, “shared normal reach”, and “shared special reach”. The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed mode of the fluctuation pattern based on the rough fluctuation pattern mode notified by the fluctuation pattern command. A plurality of detailed variation pattern aspects that can be selected are defined for each of the different aspects.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time is measured (measured) by the time measuring device 262. Then, based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 262, the mode of the fluctuation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode such as the background image are changed to a special effect mode every time a fixed time elapses. Control to do so. For this reason, the variation pattern table 222a defines a variation pattern of a special effect mode and a variation pattern of a normal effect mode. Then, when it is determined that the effect is performed in the special effect mode based on the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, 1 is selected from the change patterns of the special effect mode in the change pattern table 222a. The mode of the fluctuation pattern is selected. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect is not executed in the special effect mode (that is, the effect is executed in the normal effect mode) based on the time information (time information) of the time counting device 262, the variation pattern table The variation pattern mode of 1 is selected from the variation patterns of the normal effect mode of 222a.

  That is, the fluctuation pattern table 222a defines a plurality of detailed modes for each rough mode of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110. A variation pattern mode of a normal performance mode and a variation pattern mode of a special performance mode are defined.

  Next, the effect switching table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timekeeping device 262 whether the effect mode is the normal effect mode or the special effect mode. Then, the effect switching table 222b determines whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a normal effect mode or a special effect mode. Used for.

  This effect mode is determined in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination value of the effect switching table 222b shown in FIG. The production mode is specified according to the elapsed time T (see S1602 in FIG. 29) determined based on the time information (timekeeping information) of the timing device 262 (see S1603 in FIG. 29).

  FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the effect switching table 222b stored in the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 8, in the effect switching table 222b, the type of effect period is defined in association with the value of the elapsed time T after powering on the gaming machine. When the value of the elapsed time T indicates the normal effect period, it is provided in the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. The display special effect flag 233k is turned off. Then, based on these flags, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the value of the elapsed time T indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are provided. The display special effect flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, 60 minutes after the power is turned on is the normal production period, and 10 minutes after 60 minutes have elapsed is the special production period. Then, after 10 minutes of the special effect period has elapsed, the normal effect period is again set, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes. After that, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  In this way, except for 60 minutes immediately after the power is turned on, if a game is played for 1 hour, the performance period is always switched to a different one, so that the player can feel a novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if a player plays a game for a long time, only the same effect is produced, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. In addition, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, so that the player can easily understand the time period of the special effect period and the time period of the normal effect period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game for each player, aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect mode suitable for the player's taste is performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Although the correspondence between the elapsed time T and the effect period after the elapsed time T of 180 minutes is omitted in FIG. 8, the special effect period of 10 minutes and 50 minutes are actually applied after 180 minutes. It is set such that the normal production period of is alternately repeated. The range of the elapsed time T in the effect switching table 222b may be set at least for the business hours of one day of the hall. For example, the elapsed time T and the effect are within a range of less than 1440 minutes (24 hours). Correspondence with a period may be set, or correspondence with several days may be set. Further, the types of effect periods are not necessarily limited to the two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more types of effect periods in which the manners of effects performed are different from each other may be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the table that defines the type of effect period for each value of the elapsed time T is defined, but it is not necessary to prepare the table that corresponds to all the values of T. For example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period are defined one by one, and the value of the elapsed time T is specified. When it is out of the range, a predetermined value may be added to the range of the value of the specified elapsed time T. As a specific example, for example, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes. It is defined as 00 seconds, and when the value of the elapsed time T reaches 60 minutes 00 seconds, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period It may be controlled to add 60 minutes 00 seconds to each and reset the type of the effect period in the range of the value of the elapsed time T from 60 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds.

  More specifically, in the effect switching table 222b, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period is 0 minutes 00 seconds to 50 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period is Only the information that the time is 50 minutes 00 seconds to 60 minutes 00 seconds is specified. Then, based on the power being turned on, the information defined in the effect switching table 222b is duplicated in a predetermined area of the RAM 223, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the duplicated information. Then, when the elapsed time T reaches the maximum value of 60 minutes 00 seconds of the value of the elapsed time T specified in the duplicated information, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the duplicated information to obtain a new value. Update to information. That is, the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the normal effect period is 60 minutes 00 seconds to 110 minutes 00 seconds, and the range of the value of the elapsed time T that is the special effect period is 110 minutes 00 seconds to 120 minutes 00 seconds. The information is updated. After that, every 60 minutes 00 seconds, 60 minutes 00 seconds are added to the copied information to update the new information, and the performance period is based on the updated information and the elapsed time T. Determine the type of.

  In this case, the amount of data in the effect switching table 222b decreases, so that the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced. Therefore, the price of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a special effect flag 223e, and a time information storage area 223f. And are provided at least.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is obtained. The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the prize information command is extracted as the prize information, and the prize information is changed to the prize information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1407 in FIG. 31). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere number for the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1702 in FIG. 30). The fluctuation start flag 223c is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the power is cut off. When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1707 in FIG. 30). In addition, the stop type selection flag 223d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the power is cut off.

  The special effect flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is the special effect period. This special effect flag 223e changes from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the effect switching table 222b in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. It is turned on when it is determined to switch to (see S1610 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, it is turned off when it is determined based on the effect switching table 222b that the special effect period is switched to the normal effect period (see S1606 in FIG. 29). The special effect flag 223e is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the power is cut off. When the special effect flag 223e is turned on, a special effect command is output (see S1611 in FIG. 29). Therefore, based on the reception of the special effect command, the display control device 114 or the like causes the round effect or the demonstration effect. And other effects are executed in a special effect mode. Then, the special effect mode continues until the display control device 114 or the like receives the normal effect command (see S1607 in FIG. 29) output based on the turning off of the special effect flag 223e.

  Since the special effect period or the normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process (S1402 in FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) is performed. In (1), when selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110, is it a special effect period by checking the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262? It is not necessary to determine whether or not it is necessary to simply check whether or not the special effect flag 223e is turned on. Therefore, the processing for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In addition, if a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are arranged side by side (configuring an island) in the hall, the effect mode of the effect executed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 configuring an island can be changed in a time zone. Accordingly, it is possible to switch to different production modes (island interlocking) all at once. By performing the island interlocking, the display effect (background and third symbol display mode, character giving a notice, etc.), voice effect (sound effect, back music, etc.), etc. are completely different depending on the timing of playing the game. Since it is executed, each player can start the game at the timing when the effect in the effect mode that suits his / her preference is performed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the type of effect period is switched according to the elapsed time, but island interlocking may be performed according to the day of the week, the date, the season, or the like.

  The time information storage area 223f is an area in which time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. In the time acquisition process (see S1211 of FIG. 26) of the start-up process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, the current time information (timekeeping information) obtained from the clock device 262 is stored. The stored timekeeping information is obtained by calculating the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 and performing the normal production period. It is used to determine whether there is a special effect period or a special effect period (see S1604 in FIG. 29). Since the contents stored in the RAM 223 are not backed up, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223f is cleared.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the type of the effect period is determined based on the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f, which is acquired from the time measuring device 262 during the startup process, so that the plurality of pachinko machines in the hall are displayed. If the start-up process is performed at the machine 10, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can be also adjusted. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is correct, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. The timing for switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on T and the timing for switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period can be matched based on the elapsed time T. As a result, a person involved in the hall can arrange the production periods of the respective pachinko machines 10 simply by turning on the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 all at once. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal production period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special production period, so that the player who is playing the game performs the production in a different presentation mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the situation. In addition, as a method of simultaneously turning on the power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10, for example, an island composed of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is provided, and an external power source that can turn on the power for each island is used. It should be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is judged from the time information of the clock device 262, and the type of the effect period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information and the elapsed time confirmation process (the time information acquired during the startup process ( The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired in S1311), and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to deterioration over time, the time information deviated from each other is not directly used for the determination of the type of the effect period, but is elapsed. Since it can be converted to a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of the effect period, the influence of the deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production periods of the respective pachinko machines 10 can be aligned, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal production period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special production period, so that the player playing the game can It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed in a performance mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  The timer device 262 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and has a real time clock (RTC) capable of measuring the current time. The electrical configuration of the clock device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the clock device 262. The clock device 262 has an input / output port 350, a device control unit 351, and a register 352. Further, a power source 263 for the timer device is connected to the timer device 262. The power supply 263 for the timekeeping device is a power supply dedicated to the timekeeping device 262, which is different from the power supply for the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the timekeeping device 262 even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. A button-type battery is used as the power supply 263 for the timer.

  An input / output port 350 and a register 352 are connected to the device control unit 351 of the clock device 262. The input / output port 350 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 so that they can communicate with each other. The device control unit 351 uses (controls) the register 352 to perform various controls such as clocking the current time and executing an alarm at the set time. Here, the register 352 has a register table including a plurality of registers, as shown in FIG. This register table includes a clock register 352a and a throwing time storage area 352b. That is, as shown in FIG. 9, the register 352 of the clock device 262 is provided with at least a clock register 352a and an input time storage area 352b.

  The clock register 352a is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every one second. Further, the input time storage area 352b is a storage area in which various information such as timekeeping information can be written and the stored information can be overwritten. In the turning-on time storage area 352b, the timekeeping information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is written when there is power-off occurrence information in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221. This is an area (see S1317 in FIG. 28).

  Here, the register table included in the register 352 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table of the register 352. As shown in FIG. 10, the register 352 can hold a maximum of 8 bits of data at each of 15 addresses 0H to EH in the register table. Of these addresses, addresses 0H to 6H correspond to the clock register 352a, and each address represents seconds, minutes, hours, days of the week, days, months, and years, respectively.

  Details of the clock register 352b will be described by taking the address 0H representing seconds as an example. Bit 7 of address 0H is a non-rewritable bit fixed to L, and the current number of seconds is expressed using bits 0 to bit 6. The symbol "○" attached to bit7 in FIG. 10 is a symbol indicating that the bit cannot be rewritten, and has the same meaning at other addresses. Bit0 to bit6 correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively. Depending on whether each bit is H or L, the number of seconds at the current time is It is shown if there is.

  For example, when the number of seconds at the current time is 5 seconds, both bit0 representing 1 second and bit2 representing 4 seconds are H, and bits 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are all L. Accordingly, 5 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bit of H, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time. When the number of seconds at the current time is 29 seconds, bit0 representing 1 second, bit3 representing 8 seconds, and bit5 representing 20 seconds become H, and bits 1, 2, 4, and 6 are all L. Become. Accordingly, 29 seconds, which is the sum of the number of seconds represented by the bit of H, can be expressed as the number of seconds at the current time.

  The address 1H indicating the minute, the address 2H indicating the hour, the address 4H indicating the day, the address 5H indicating the month, and the address 6H indicating the year also correspond to the bit that is H, like the address 0H indicating the second. The current time is represented by the sum of numerical values. Regarding the address 6H representing the year, the last two digits of the Christian era are represented, and the first two digits of the Christian era are fixed at 20. That is, the address 6H representing the year can represent only the years 2000 to 2099.

  Regarding the address 3H representing the day of the week, bits 0 to 6 correspond to Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, and Saturday, respectively, and any one bit is H and the other bits are L. It becomes possible to express a specific day of the week. For example, if the current day is Wednesday, bit3 becomes H and bit0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, becomes L.

  The addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the input time storage area 352b and can store up to 3 bytes of data. Registers for storing seconds (corresponding to address 7H), registers for storing minutes (corresponding to address 8H), and registers for storing time (corresponding to address 9H) are allocated to the input time storage area 352b by 1 byte each. ing. The correspondence between each bit and the seconds, minutes, and hours is the same as that of the addresses 0H to 2H.

  That is, the bit0 to bit6 of the register that stores seconds correspond to 1 second, 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds, respectively, and the bits 0 to bit6 of the register that stores minutes are , 1 minute, 2 minutes, 4 minutes, 8 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes, respectively, and bit0 to bit5 of the register that stores time are 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 minutes, respectively. It corresponds to hours, 10 hours, and 20 hours. In FIG. 10, all bits are marked with a symbol "●", but this is a symbol indicating that the information can be rewritten and read, and at other addresses. Also have the same meaning.

  The correspondence relationship between each bit of the clock register 352a and the input time storage area 352b and the number of seconds, the number of minutes, etc. is not limited to the form of this embodiment. For example, the power of 2 may be associated with the numerical value of each bit. Further, in the present embodiment, the input time storage area 352b is configured by 3 bytes, but the number of bytes may be reduced by storing only the hour and minute values as the stored time information. Also, the number of bytes may be increased by adding a register capable of storing milliseconds in addition to seconds, minutes, and hours. Further, instead of storing the timekeeping information in the input time storage area 352b, a storage means such as a RAM may be provided outside the timekeeping device 262. In this case, the power supply to the storage means may be configured to be performed by the power supply 263 for the timing device, or a power supply dedicated to the storage means may be separately provided.

  Addresses AH to CH are registers used to output an alarm signal at a set time, and addresses DH and EH are registers that can output an interrupt signal at each set cycle. When the alarm function or the interrupt function is not used, the addresses AH to EH can be used as the turn-on time storage area 352b instead of the addresses 7H to 9H. In this case, since 3 bytes of the addresses 7H to 9H can be reduced, the number of registers can be reduced, and the cost of the clock device 262 can be reduced.

  Although only the registers assigned to addresses 0H to EH are shown in FIG. 10, in addition to these registers, registers to which addresses other than 0H to EH are assigned are provided. Registers and the like for changing the settings of the interrupt function and the like are provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240, 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model with a lottery probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be system reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored as a character ROM 234.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged on a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the instructions that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2, which will be described later, of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is the first program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 is a fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program for each predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a becomes the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a causes the instruction pointer 231a to be stored in the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 34) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S1801 in FIG. 34) stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 36B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of the drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced with the data size of the image data to be transferred.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are stored in the storage source end address.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, rear image area 235c, character pattern area. 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 33).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12, on the display screen of the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in Fig. 12 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in Fig. 12 (c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, a power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple change effect using the change image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image has already been resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, the main symbols including the rear symbols such as a wooden box, the rear symbols and the planer, the furoshiki, the helmet character, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a normal effect data table storage area 233b1, a special effect data table storage area 233b2, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, and a drawing. It has at least a list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a stored image data determination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and a display special effect flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The normal data table storage area 233b1 and the special data table storage area 233b2 are the third with the passage of time for one effect displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 in the normal effect period and the special effect period, respectively. A display data table that describes the display contents to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, and transfer data of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 out of the image data used in one presentation displayed by the display data table. This is an area for storing information and a transfer data table that defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , The display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect which is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A, jackpot B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The round effect is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall-related person can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

  In the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and the special effect data table storage area 233b2, one display data table corresponding to the round effect and one display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect are stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The semi-transparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semi-transparent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”), or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

  Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time after the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information indicating the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the offset information by expressing the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 13) is the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines such as pachinko machines other than gaming machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of the sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist corresponding to the address. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 14).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  It should be noted that, as with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 16) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 33). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 45B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 35B), and When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 of FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 35B) are displayed so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 35 (b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 45A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 45 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the contents of the image drawing instructions are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) that describes the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. )), The pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 41) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 15), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 16, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type according to the type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) , Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2, ..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

  Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 41). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3509 in FIG. 46). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3510 in FIG. 46). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information that has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 35B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The display special effect flag 233k is a flag indicating whether or not the current effect period is the special effect period. This display special effect flag 233k determines that the timekeeping data acquired from the timekeeping device 262 in the process of S1604 of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311 of FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is the special effect period. In this case, the special effect flag 223e is set to ON and the special effect command is set to be output to the display control device 113 (S1610 to S1611). Then, the MPU 231 of the display control device 113 sets the display special effect flag 233k to ON based on the reception of this special effect command, so that the current state in the display control device 113 is the special effect period. It is configured to be able to determine that

  It should be noted that this display special effect flag 233k is set to OFF (S2207 in FIG. 36) when the normal effect command indicating that the state is the normal effect period is received, and the state is the normal effect period. Can be discriminated by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. In the initial setting executed when the power is turned on, the display special effect flag 233k is configured to be turned off as an initial state.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 25. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the big hit is A or the big hit B.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. Further, if it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is a jackpot A (S213).

  When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot A (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203f is set to ON (S213). When it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B) (S212: No), the probability variation flag 203f is set to OFF, and 100 is set in the time saving medium counter 223e (S214). Then, the big hit start of the special symbol is set (S215), and this processing is ended. By the processing of S215, when the jackpot start of the special symbol is set, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 25) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes, and the third symbol display In the device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S216), and the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 1. If it is above (S216: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values stored in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low is three, “7,307,582” stored in the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability. The random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first hit random number table 202a for high probability, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238. , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". ..

  Also, whether the current is a low probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of a special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of a special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203f, and if these values match, the special value It is determined that it is a jackpot of the design.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301. (S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and a special symbol of three types (a big hit) It is determined which one of A and jackpot B) is a jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is the big hit A (probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “49 to 99”, the big hit B. It is determined that it is (time / hour jackpot) (see FIG. 7B).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S304). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S304, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  For example, the variation patterns for dislodgement are defined as "dislodge (for long time)", "dislodge (for short time)", "disjoint normal reach", "disengagement super reach", and "disengagement special reach". As for the variation pattern of jackpot A and jackpot B, "common normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, "shared special reach" types are defined, and variation patterns for jackpot A are "special reach" types. As the variation pattern of common win / off, various types of "common normal reach", various types of "shared super reach", and various types of "shared special reach" are defined.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of position (S302: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S305). In the processing of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear outreach, or complete outreach is set.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete disconnection is set, and if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear disconnection is set, and "98" is set. , 99 ”, the front / rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol comes off in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S304, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is checked based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is completed, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S308 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reservation number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated at S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing are set in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the process of S407, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is a big hit (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit), and its A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A). It is determined by comparing with (winning value) one by one. As described above, the random number that is a big hit for the special symbol when the probability of the special symbol is low is three, “7,307,582” stored in the first per-random number table 202a for the low probability. The random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first hit random number table 202a for high probability, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238. , 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". ..

  Also, whether the current is a low probability state of a special symbol or a high probability state of a special symbol can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203f. Specifically, if the probability variation flag 203f is on, it is a high probability state of a special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203f is off, it is a low probability state of a special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability variation flag 203f, and if these values match, the special value It is determined that it is a jackpot of the design.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 and the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table are compared, Of the two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is the big hit A (probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “49 to 99”, the big hit B. It is determined that it is (time saving big hit) (see FIG. 8A).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front / rear detachment reach is performed. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than the front / back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation flag 203f is ON, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability probability stop type selection table, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than a deviation from the front and rear. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203f is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than the deviation from the front and rear. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a variation pattern selection table (FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202, and the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (a big hit in the case of a big hit). It is selected according to the type). In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disengagement, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach" "Various patterns are defined, and as variation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of" common normal reach "," shared super reach ", and" shared special reach "are defined. Various "reach" are defined, and various variation patterns of common win / off are defined as "common normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach". Then, from the various variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table, the variation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  By the processing of S407, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores these information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a. , It is determined whether or not the display of the continuous notice effect is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64 are accompanied. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery for the normal symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it enter the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and thus acquired in the process of S607. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per normal symbol for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 7C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S610 or S611, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S612), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "O" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the ordinary symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance opening The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the processing of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the release period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. The display (lighting display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) in the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is finished, and in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S625, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not a ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if a ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the ordinary symbol) is acquired (S702). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up processing, the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) and the starting prize winning process (see FIG. 19) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S303 or the process of S305 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the second random number counter C4 can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1008, if the information on the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run out of control.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1102). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1102: No), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if the special symbol is a big hit (1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1103). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1104), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S1105). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1103: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1106, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1106: No), this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1318 (see FIG. 28) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous blackout”) in the current startup processing. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 28, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1314 in FIG. 28), the power-off process of S1318 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1318 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1316 in FIG. 28). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, the process of S1208 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). Then, the time acquisition process is executed (S1211), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110. Details of the time acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, so that the process of S1204 to S1206 is performed. This is a case where processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the time acquisition process is performed. It executes (S1211), sets interrupt permission (S1212), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached through the processing of S1204 and S1206. If only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, the time acquisition process (S1211) executed by the MPU 221 during the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The time acquisition process (S1211) is a process for storing the time when the power is turned on. The time information acquired by this processing is used to determine the elapsed time from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation processing (see S1311 in FIG. 28) performed in the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 described later. To be

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the time acquisition process (S1211). When the time acquisition process (S1211) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is turned on (S1501), and if it is not turned on (S1501: No), the timer device Information of the current time is acquired from the clock register 352a of 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1501: Yes), the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262 is read (S1502), and the closing time storage area 352b is read. It is determined whether the time information is stored in (S1503). As a result, when it is determined that the time information is not stored (S1503: No), the current time information is acquired from the timing register 352a of the timing device 262 (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time information is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 (S1503: Yes), the process of S1504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1505.

  In the processing of S1505, the time information read in the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1504 is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (S1505), and this processing is ended.

  In this way, since the time information for determining the type of the effect period is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 by this processing, the timing at which the start-up processing is performed in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall is determined. If matched, the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. If the timing at which the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f is correct, the elapsed time T calculated in the elapsed time confirmation process (see S1311 of FIG. 28) in each pachinko machine 10 can also be adjusted. It is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. As a result, a person involved in the hall can arrange the production periods of the respective pachinko machines 10 simply by turning on the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall all at once. Therefore, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal production period, and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special production period, so that the player who is playing the game performs the production in a different presentation mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the time is judged from the time information of the clock device 262, and the type of the effect period is not switched according to the time zone, but the time information acquired at the time of the startup process and the elapsed time confirmation process The elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired therein, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to deterioration over time, the time information deviated from each other is not directly used for the determination of the type of the effect period, but is elapsed. Since it can be converted to a relative value of time T and used for determining the type of the effect period, the influence of the deviation can be reduced. Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production periods of the respective pachinko machines 10 can be aligned, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal production period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special production period, so that the player playing the game can It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed in a performance mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on in the state where the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (that is, the off state), the time information when the power is turned on is displayed. The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM is stored in the time information storage area 223f when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off in the main process (FIG. 28) described later. It is stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262. The timekeeping device 262 operates based on the power supply from the power supply 263 for the timekeeping device even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. It is maintained even when the power is off. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on when the power is turned on, instead of the current time information, it is stored in the loading time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262, The time information held even during the power failure state is read out and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223.

  As a result, for example, when it is necessary to turn off one pachinko machine 10 during business due to a reason such as a failure of the pachinko machine 10 that requires board replacement or an on-site inspection. Also, when the power is turned on again with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, when the power is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off last time, the time is acquired and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262 when the power is cut off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. Therefore, if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are powered on at the same time with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Even when the power is turned on again for the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to store the time information when the power is turned on all at once in the time information storage area 223f simply by turning on the RAM erase switch 122. It is possible to determine the elapsed time T based on the same time information before and after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the same elapsed time T as that of the other gaming machines, so that the game machine is in the power-off state. Only the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from shifting the timing of switching the presentation mode, and the player who is playing the game feels strange that the performance is being performed in a different presentation mode than the other pachinko machines 10. It can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the time acquisition process (see S1211 of FIG. 26), when it is detected that the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, it is stored in the throwing time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262. The time information is read out (see S1502) and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 (see S1505), but the present invention is not limited to this form. For example, a switch unit dedicated to the time acquisition process different from the RAM erasing switch 122 is provided, and when the switch unit is turned on in the time acquisition process (S1211), the time-of-day storage area of the timekeeping device 262 is stored. The time information stored in 352b may be read.

  As a result, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262 can be stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 while retaining the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power was cut off. You can Therefore, even if the pending ball is turned off in the state where it remains, or even if it is turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it remains based on the power being turned on again. Since it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from disappearing or shifting from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

  Further, instead of using a switch means such as the RAM erasing switch 122, when the time measured by the time measuring device 262 is within a predetermined time zone, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b of the time measuring device 262 is displayed. It may be configured to read. In this case, the business hours of the hall may be set as the predetermined time zone, for example, 10:00 to 22:45.

  As a result, an employee of the hall turns on the pachinko machine 10 that was turned off during business hours by turning on the power again without turning on the RAM erase switch 122 due to a mistake. It is possible to prevent the time when the power is turned on from being stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 233, and the elapsed time T from deviating from the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been in the power-off state. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the timing at which the effect period is switched between the pachinko machine 10 that is in the power-off state during business hours and the pachinko machine 10 that is not in the power-off state. In addition, since the time information stored in the time information storage area 233f is selected according to the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262, the employee of the hall performs a special operation when the power is turned on. There is no need to do so, and the labor of the employees in the hall can be reduced.

  Further, although the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to store the time information read in the processing of S1502 or the processing of S1504 in the time information storage area 223f, it is provided in the register 352 instead. Alternatively, the register table (see FIG. 10) may be stored in an unused bit. The unused bits referred to here are, for example, the bit 6 of the address BH and the bits 4 to 7 of the address EH, and among the bits marked with “●” in FIG. 10, except the input time storage area 352b. Of the bit. As described above, these bits are bits that allow rewriting and reading of information, and even if data is rewritten, they do not affect the operation of the clock device 262 at all. As a result, the register table provided in the register 352 can be used efficiently, so that the addresses assigned to the input time storage area 352b can be reduced.

  Specifically, for example, information indicating seconds is stored in bit0 to bit6 of address 7H, information indicating minutes is stored in bit7 of address 7H, and bit0 to bit5 of address 8H, and bit6 and bit7 of address 8H are stored. Information indicating time may be stored in bits 4 to 7 of the address EH. As a result, the addresses 9H not used for storing data can be reduced, and the capacity of the register 352 can be reduced, so that the cost of the clock device 262 can be reduced.

  In the register table provided in the register 352 of the present embodiment, in FIG. 10, the bit marked with “◯” is the L fixed non-rewritable bit. The bit marked with may be configured to be rewritable, and the time information read in the process of S1502 or S1504 may be stored in the bit marked with "○". As a result, the register table can be used more efficiently than when the time information is stored only in the bit marked with "●", so that the capacity of the register 352 can be further reduced, and the clock device can be used. It is possible to further reduce the price of 262.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1301 this time has been executed (S1301), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1302 to S1311, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1312 and the variable display setting process of S1313 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1305 without notifying the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is pressed is monitored, and it corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period when the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including the information on the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image changing command, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to the change this time, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the feeling of expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to an effect that can be held or to use the frame button 22 as a determination button for selecting one reach effect from among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1311, the elapsed time confirmation processing is executed (S1311). In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), the current presentation period is determined based on the time information (clock information) of the clock device 262. Details of this elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1314). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1316) and stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. The present time information is written in the turning-on time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262 (S1317), and power-off processing is executed (S1318). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1319), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1314 (S1314: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1315), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1315: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1315: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311). This elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the time information (time measurement information) of the time measurement device 262. Based on the, the current performance period is determined.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311), first, the information of the current time is read from the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 (S1601), and the read current time and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 are read. Based on, the elapsed time T from the power-on is calculated (S1602). Here, as a method of calculating the elapsed time T, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 may be subtracted from the information indicating the current time read from the clock register 352a of the time measuring device 262. For example, the information of the current time read from the clock register 352a indicates AM10: 15 (that is, all bits at address 0H are L, bits 0, 2, and 4 at address 1H are H, and bits 1, 3, 5 and 7 are L, the bit 4 of the address 2H is H, and the bits 0 to 3, 5 to 7 are L), and the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f indicates AM 9:00 (that is, all of the addresses 0H and 1H). Is L, the bits 0, 3 of the address 2H are H, and the bits 1, 2, 4 to 7 are L), the elapsed time T is 75 minutes by taking the difference between 10:15 and 9:00. It is calculated.

  Then, based on the calculated elapsed time T and the effect switching table (see FIG. 8) of the ROM 222, the current effect period is specified (S1603), and it is determined whether or not the current effect period is the special effect period. Yes (S1604).

  As a result of the processing in S1604, when it is determined that the special effect period is not in effect (that is, the normal effect period) (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605). If the special effect flag 223e is on (S1605: Yes), it means that the special effect period has been switched to the normal effect period in the main processing this time, so the special effect flag is turned off (S1606). Next, the normal effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or the demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 to the normal effect mode is set (S1607), and further the back surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A rear image change command for changing the image to a normal rear image is set (S1608), and this processing ends. Further, in the processing of S1605, if the special effect flag is off (S1605: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S1604, when it is determined that it is the special effect period (S1604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is ON (S1609). If the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S1609: Yes), this process ends. If the special effect flag 223e is off, it means that the normal effect period has been switched to the special effect period in the main processing this time, so the special effect flag is turned on (S1610). Next, a special effect command for setting the effect mode of the round effect or the demonstration effect executed by the display control device 114 as a special effect mode is set (S1611), and the rear surface displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A rear image change command for changing the image to a normal rear image is set (S1612), and this processing ends.

  Since the special effect period or the normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) (see S1402 of FIG. 30). ), When selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clock information) of the timer 262 is checked to determine whether or not it is the special effect period. It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the processing for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special effect flag 223e is switched when the effect period is switched, but the special effect flag 223e may be updated every time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed. Further, the setting of the normal effect command (S1607) or the setting of the special effect command (S1611) may be performed each time the elapsed time confirmation process is performed.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 28) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . In addition, in this processing, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination processing, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern is performed (S1402), and the process returns to the main process. The fluctuation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set the display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Details of the variation pattern selection process (S1402) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 33) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1407 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) or when the special symbol is drawn, the starting prize Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1407 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1407, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1406: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1409). After the processing of S1409 ends, next, the winning information (winning / non-hit, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1409 is the first in the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. It is stored in the area (S1410) and the process returns to the main process.

  In the process of S1408, if the winning information command has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1411). When the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( (S1413), this process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1411, when the round number command is not received (S1411: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the processing according to the received command is executed ( (S1419), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp controller 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display controller 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation pattern selection processing (see S1402 in FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this variation pattern selection processing (S1402). This fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1402) is executed in the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the third symbol This is processing for selecting the type of variation pattern that is executed in the display device 81.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S2702).

  If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on, the change pattern type for the special effect period is extracted from the change pattern types based on the change pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S2703). ), And this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2702: No), the normal effect period of the variation pattern types based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. The variation pattern type for use is extracted (S2704), and this processing ends.

  Based on the variation pattern type extracted by the processing of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, different variation pattern types for the effect period are selected depending on whether or not the special effect flag 223e is turned on, so that a wide variety of effects can be executed and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. Can be improved. Therefore, even if a player plays a game for a long time, only the same effect is produced, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. Further, as described above, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are cyclically repeated, so that the player can easily understand the time period of the special effect period and the time period of the normal effect period. can do. Therefore, it is possible to start the game for each player, aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect mode suitable for the player's taste is performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1313). This fluctuation display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S1313), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the variation pattern selection process (see S1402) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30). ), The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 30), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, in the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. . In the process of S1710, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). The variable display setting process is ended. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  Here, if the boot program first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored, while the control can be performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S1902, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1903). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 33) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 33) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  In this way, by executing the boot process (S1801), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, instead of storing all boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset release are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 34, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S1902. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. Alternatively, the processing of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S1902.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 33. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, “OFF” or “0” is set unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 45A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 45A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 11 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B). The determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately confirm that the operation efficiency is deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. If it is through the device 113, that is, if the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, and its transfer takes time, so that the main image continues to be displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the drawing of a new image is started during the drawing of an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 35B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

  After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2103) or the simple display setting process (S2109). While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2104), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105). The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside, complete disconnection) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2101, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the S2104 of FIG. Move to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 40, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2102) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 36, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a special effect command in the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if it is determined that there is a special effect command (S2204: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is set. After turning on (S2205), the process returns to S2201. When the special effect flag is turned on, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect of the special effect mode is selected in the round number command processing (S2213) described later. In the demo display process (S3017) described later, the demo display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect of the special effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect and the demonstration effect are executed in a special effect mode.

  By switching to the special effect mode the effect that was being performed in the normal effect mode until then, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in playing the game.

  If it is determined in the process of S2304 that there is no special effect command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a normal effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If it is determined that there is a normal effect command (S2206: Yes), the display special effect flag 233k is turned off (S2207), and the process returns to S2201. If the special effect flag is turned off, the round number display data table corresponding to the round effect in the normal effect mode is selected in the round number command processing (S2213) described later. In the demo display process (S3017) described later, the demo display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect in the normal effect mode is selected. Therefore, in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect and the demonstration effect are executed in the normal effect mode.

  By switching the production that has been executed in a special production mode until then to the normal production mode, it is possible to make the player feel novelty, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in playing the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the special effect command output from the voice lamp control device 113, the effect mode of the effect executed in the third symbol display device is a special effect mode and a normal effect mode. It is determined in which effect mode to execute, instead of this, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to read the time information of the clock device 262, and based on the read time, the special effect period or the normal effect. You may decide whether it is a period.

  If it is determined that there is no normal effect command in the process of S2206, then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2208). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2208: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2209), and the processing returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S2209). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2209) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2303, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305 is updated, while the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the table 233f, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 for normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set by the process of S2304 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2208, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2208: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), If there is a display variation type command (S2210: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front / rear reach, reach other than out-of-front / outside, complete disconnection, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to OFF (S2403), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the lapse of a predetermined time after the variation based on the data table is started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-described task process (S2104), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the identified stop is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of fluctuations at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2401, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description will be continued. In the process of S2210, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2212). If there is a display round number command (S2212: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp controller 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, it is confirmed whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is turned on (S2601), and if the display special effect flag 233k is turned on (S2601: Yes), it corresponds to the received command. The selected round number display data table is selected from the special effect data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2602). On the other hand, if the display special effect flag 233k is off (S2601: No), the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is selected from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Yes (S2602).

  Depending on whether the special effect flag is ON or OFF, the number-of-rounds display data table selected from either the normal effect data table 233b1 or the special effect data table 233b2 is set in the display data table 233d. The mode can be switched. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time the presentation mode is switched, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and improve the player's interest in the game.

  Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2604).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2602 or S2603, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2605), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2606). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are turned off (S2607), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2212, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2212: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2214), and If there is an image change command (S2214: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2215), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S2801). . Then, among the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the back surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on, and other back surface images The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S2802), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S2802. .

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S2802 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at the time point is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident type) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back surface image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2214, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2214: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2216), and there is an error command. If (S2216: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2217), and the process returns to S2201.

  Details of the error command process (S2217) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2902), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 37. In the process of S2216, if it is determined that there is no error command (S2216: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2218), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area, and if there is a new unprocessed command (S2201: Yes). ), And the processes of S2202 to S2218 are executed again. Then, the processing of S2201 to S2218 is repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2108) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 12, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop command are displayed. Only the type commands are extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 38), which are the processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed, and other commands are executed. Perform the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 37) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2301. Further, since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , S2302, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 41, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3001), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

  In the task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer updating process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing is ended. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process is terminated and returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 41, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing (S2104), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. , Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalization display effect is not yet effected, and it is the time to effect the finalization display. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time elapses after the variation is started, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop design in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect, so the demo display process is executed (S3017). ), And returns to the V interrupt process.

  Here, the details of the demo display process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the demo display process. This process is a process for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 after a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the finalized display effect.

  In the demonstration display effect, first, it is determined whether or not the display special effect flag 233k is turned on (S3801). When it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is on (S3801: Yes), it indicates that the present time is the special effect period. Therefore, in order to execute the demonstration effect in the special effect mode, the special effect is performed. The demo display data table is acquired from the use data table storage area 233b2 and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3802), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display special effect flag 233k is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), it indicates that the present time is the normal effect period, so the demonstration effect is executed in the normal effect mode. In order to do so, the demo display data table is acquired from the normal effect data table storage area 233b1 and set in the display data table storage area 233d (S3803), and the process proceeds to S3804.

  In the processing of S3804 performed after the processing of S3802 or S3803, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3804). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3805). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3006), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3007), the present process is terminated, and the display setting process (S2103) is performed. Return.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is on (S3016: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 35B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The display data table that defines that the image (FIGS. 12B and 12C) is stopped and displayed is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for causing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3401, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3403 (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 35B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 35B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 35B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 36 to 40) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 41 to 44) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) (see S3301: No in FIG. 45A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3005) of the previously executed display setting process (S2103). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, is set to on (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 and then receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S3506 that the transfer processing has not ended (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing of S3505, even when the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the processing proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S3508), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S3517. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3507: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3509). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3509: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3513 (S3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3514, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image necessary for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2104). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprites in the rearranged sprite order are displayed in detail. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (the storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 35B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame will be replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating the image for one frame, the display process for the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the pachinko machine, the period in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode (normal effect period) and the period in which the effect is executed in the special effect mode different from the normal effect mode ( There are two types of periods including a special effect period), and which period is present is determined by the voice lamp control device 114 based on the time information (clock information) of the clock device 262. Then, when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern type corresponding to the determined effect period is selected, and the variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81 based on the selected variation pattern type. A pattern effect is executed.

  Also, each time the sound lamp control device 114 determines that the effect period has changed to a different effect period, a command corresponding to the effect period after the change is output to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 determines the current effect period based on the command output by the voice lamp control device 114, and selects the display data table corresponding to the round effect or the demonstration effect based on the determined effect period. To do.

  Thereby, the effect mode of the variable pattern effect, the round effect, and the demonstration effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is executed in the normal effect mode or in the special effect mode according to the elapsed time. To do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time it is switched to a different effect mode, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to improve the interest of the player in the game. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the effect period is determined by the voice lamp control device 114, the time is determined from the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262, and the type of the effect period is switched according to the time zone. Instead, the elapsed time T is calculated from the time information acquired during the startup process and the time information acquired during the elapsed time confirmation process, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the elapsed time T. There is. As a result, even if the time information of the time measuring device 262 of each pachinko machine 10 is deviated from each other due to aged deterioration or the like in the hall in which the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the time information that is deviated from each other is displayed in the rendering period. It is possible to reduce the influence of the deviation because it is possible to convert the relative value of the elapsed time T and use it for the determination of the type of the effect period, instead of directly using the determination of the type of

  Therefore, in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period based on the elapsed time T and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the elapsed time T. Therefore, since the production periods of the respective pachinko machines 10 can be aligned, some of the pachinko machines 10 are in the normal production period and the other pachinko machines 10 are in the special production period, so that the player playing the game can It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed in a performance mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the power is cut off, the time information acquired during the startup process based on the power-on is stored in the charging time storage area 352b of the clock device 262 to measure the time. Since the device 262 continues to be supplied with power from the power supply 263 for timekeeping device even during the power failure state, the time information stored in the closing time storage area 352b is held even during the power failure state. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 stores the time in the storage time storage area storage area 352b instead of the time information measured by the time measuring device 262 at the power-on time. The stored time information is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and is used to determine the elapsed time T.

  Due to this, for example, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is cut off due to the reason that the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even when it is necessary to set the state, the time acquisition process can be performed when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off last time by simply turning the power on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. Thus, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 and stored in the closing time storage area 352b of the timekeeping device 262 when the power is cut off can be stored again in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. .

  Therefore, if the plurality of pachinko machines 10 in the hall are powered on at the same time with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off, then one pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Even when the power is turned on again for the pachinko machine 10, the RAM erasing switch 122 may be turned on to determine the elapsed time T based on the time information when the power is turned on all at once. Therefore, it is possible to match the timing of switching from the normal effect period to the special effect period and the timing of switching from the special effect period to the normal effect period based on the same elapsed time T as that of the other gaming machines, so that the game machine is in the power-off state. Only the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from shifting the timing of switching the presentation mode, and the player who is playing the game feels strange that the performance is being performed in a different presentation mode than the other pachinko machines 10. It can be suppressed.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262 on the basis of turning on the pachinko machine 10, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the timekeeping device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (timekeeping information) of 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and the identification is performed. It is configured to execute an effect according to the effect period.

  Further, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and the power supply is turned on. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. Is configured to be stored in.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the time measuring device 262 is configured to count the elapsed time from the power-on, the type of the current effect period is determined based on the elapsed time, and the determined effect period is set. It is configured to execute a corresponding effect.

  More specifically, the register 352 of the clock device 262 is provided with an elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second, and based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The elapsed time T of is specified. Then, the type of effect period can be specified based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b.

  If the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the power is turned on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is on when the power is turned on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be retained without being initialized.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262 is provided with an elapsed time counter 352c instead of the throw-in time storage area 352b. That is the point. Further, some processes included in the startup process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding the other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 48, an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The clock device 262 of the present embodiment has a register 352 as in the first embodiment, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. 49. The register table includes a clock register 352a and an elapsed time counter 352c. That is, the timekeeping device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with an elapsed time counter 352c instead of the throw-in time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The elapsed time counter 352c is a counter used to specify the elapsed time from power-on based on the count value. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is updated every one second, and is initialized (reset) when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c specifies the elapsed time T from the power-on in the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (see S1331 of FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect switching table 222b. It is used to specify the type of the presentation period based on.

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter 352c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table included in the register 352. The registers (timekeeping register 352a) assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H of the register table and the registers assigned to the addresses AH to EH are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H and the addresses AH to EH in the first embodiment. The register and the register have the same configuration and function. On the other hand, the addresses 7H to 9H correspond to the elapsed time counter 352c. In the first embodiment, in the input time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively. A register for counting, a register for counting minutes, and a register for counting time are assigned to addresses 7H to 9H, respectively.

  The register that counts the seconds allocated to the address 7H has the same configuration as the register that represents the seconds of the clock register 352a (the register allocated to the address 0H) described in the first embodiment. The number of seconds in the elapsed time is expressed by whether each bit of bit0 to bit6 corresponding to seconds, 4 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, and 40 seconds is H or L. The register that counts this second is updated by 1 every 1 second from the state of 0 seconds (state where all bits are L), and when the register is updated in the state of 59 seconds, the state of 0 seconds ( The configuration is such that all bits return to the L state.

  The register that counts the minutes assigned to the address 8H has the same configuration as the register that represents the minutes of the clock register 352a (the register assigned to the address 1H). The number of fractions of the elapsed time is expressed by whether each bit of bit0 to bit6 corresponding to minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes, and 40 minutes is H or L. The register that counts this minute is updated by 1 each time the register that counts seconds is updated from the state of 59 seconds to the state of 0 seconds (state where all bits are L). When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the state of 0 minutes (all bits are in the state of L).

  Further, the register that counts the time assigned to the address 9H has the same configuration as the register that represents the time of the clock register 352a (the register assigned to the address 2H), and is 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 3 hours. The number of hours in the elapsed time is expressed by whether each bit of bit0 to bit5 corresponding to time, 10 hours, and 20 hours is H or L. The time counting register is updated one by one each time the minute counting register is updated from the state of 59 minutes to the state of 0 minutes (state where all bits are L). When the register is updated, it is configured to return to the 0-hour state (all bits are in the L state).

  By referring to the count value of the register that counts each of the seconds, minutes, and hours, the elapsed time since the power is turned on can be specified. Then, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 can be set by simply turning on the power simultaneously for the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All the count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, since the type of the effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power source different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue updating the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c when the power is turned on is displayed. The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if the need arises, it is possible to avoid the initialization of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from that of the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, since the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, the player performing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in the effect mode. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

  In the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided in the register 352 of the time counting device 262 separately from the time counting register 352a. However, the time counting register 352a is turned on every time the RAM erase switch is turned off. It is also possible to reset the timekeeping information of and set all of bit0 to bit6 to L. As a result, the clock register 352a can be used similarly to the elapsed time counter 352c. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the elapsed time counter 352c and the number of registers can be reduced, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113, the elapsed time T is calculated based on the time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 262, but instead of this, a fixed time is used. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the information (for example, 10:00) and the time information (clock information) measured by the clock device 262. In this case, the fixed time information may be defined in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 or may be stored in the register 352 of the timing device 262. As a result, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is stored in the register 352 of the time device 262 when the time information (time information) of the time device 262 is acquired when the power is turned on, or when the power is cut off. Since it is not necessary to store in the input time storage area 352b, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified and the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  Of the startup processing, in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212, the same processing as each of the processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup processing (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. In the startup process of the second embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. ) Is executed.

  That is, in the startup process of the second embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the elapsed time counter initialization process is executed (S1221), and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). ), And shifts to the main processing. The elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221) is a process of initializing the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c, and is a process for counting the elapsed time from the start of power-on.

  Here, the details of the elapsed time counter initialization processing (S1221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the elapsed time counter initialization process (S1221), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1511). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch is on (S1511: Yes), this process ends and the process returns to the startup process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S1511: No), the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timer 262 is initialized (S1512). , This process ends.

  In this way, in the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized. Therefore, in the hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed, the elapsed time of each pachinko machine 10 can be set by simply turning on the power simultaneously for the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. All the count values of the counter 352c are initialized. Therefore, since the type of the effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  Further, in the elapsed time counter initialization process, when the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c when the power is turned on continues from the continuation. The count value is updated. Therefore, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if the need arises, it is possible to avoid the initialization of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from that of the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, since the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, the player performing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in the effect mode. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. -S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and the same process as each process of S1319 are performed. Then, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment (FIG. 28) is passed to the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). Instead, the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed.

  That is, in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), the elapsed time confirmation process 2 is executed (S1331), and the process proceeds to the command determination process (S1313). . The elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is a process for identifying the elapsed time after the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c and determining the type of the effect period.

  In the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the process corresponding to S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. In the process of S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the power-on time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262. This is a process performed to store the time information in the input time storage area 352b and to retain the time information even during the power failure state. When the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, This is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the elapsed time T is not determined based on the time information when the power is turned on, but the power is turned on based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timing device 262. Since the elapsed time T is specified, it is not necessary to hold the time information at the time of power-on in the power-off state, and it is not necessary to perform the process corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the elapsed time confirmation processing 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is a process executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the type of the current effect period based on the elapsed time T from the power-on. Is.

  In the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331), in each process of S1603 to 1612, the same process as each of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) and S1603 to 1612 in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed instead of the processes of S1601 and S1602 of the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the first embodiment. To be done.

  That is, when the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) is executed, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c of the timekeeping device 262 is read (S1621), and the elapsed time T from power-on is calculated based on the read count value. It is specified (S1622), and the process proceeds to S1603. Then, as described above, with respect to each processing after S1603, the same processing as each processing after S1603 of the elapsed time confirmation processing (S1311) in the first embodiment is executed.

  By the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331), the type of the current effect period is determined, and the state of the special effect flag 223e is changed according to the determined type of effect period. Therefore, depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, it is indicated whether it is the special effect period or the normal effect period. Therefore, the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 30) of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) is performed. In S1402 of 30), when the mode of the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table 222a based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110, the time information (time information) of the time measuring device 262 is confirmed and the special effect period. It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not, and it is only necessary to check whether the special effect flag 223e is on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing for selecting the variation pattern mode and reduce the processing load.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c whose count value is updated every one second is provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b. , The elapsed time T from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10 is specified. Then, the type of effect period can be specified based on the elapsed time T and the effect switching table 222b.

  If the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the power is turned on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, and if the RAM erase switch 122 is on when the power is turned on. The count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is configured to be retained without being initialized.

  As a result, when the RAM erase switch 122 is off when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized, so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed. In a certain hall, all the pachinko machines 10 have their elapsed time counters 352c all initialized by simply turning on the power to the plurality of gaming machines with the RAM erase switch 122 turned off. . Therefore, since the type of the effect period determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game is in a different effect mode from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power source different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, it is possible to continue updating the count value by the elapsed time counter 352c. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c is not initialized, and the elapsed time counter 352c when the power is turned on is displayed. The count value is updated from the continuation of the count value. Therefore, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if the need arises, it is possible to avoid the initialization of the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c by simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. It is possible to prevent the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c from deviating from that of the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, since the types of effect periods determined based on the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, the player performing the game is different from the other pachinko machines 10 in the effect mode. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with the performance being performed.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the count value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the clock device 262 is acquired in the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The type of the effect period is determined from the elapsed time T determined based on the acquired count value and the effect period table 222b, but the count value of the elapsed time counter 352b in the timing device 262 is used as the count value. The type of the effect period may be determined based on the result, and only the determination result may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113.

  In this case, the determination result may be notified each time the type of the effect period is determined, or may be notified only when the effect period is changed. In determining the type of the effect period, the effect period table 222b provided in the ROM 222 may be read to determine the type of the effect period, or the register 352 may be equivalent to the information defined in the effect period table 222b. May be defined and the type of the effect period may be determined with reference to this information. As a result, the elapsed time confirmation process 2 can be simplified, and the processing load on the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the elapsed time counter 352c is provided only in the register 352 of the timing device 262, but the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be provided with the same counter means. In this case, since the RAM 223 is not backed up, the counter value is cleared (reset) when the power is cut off, but when the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, The counter value may be set in the counter means of the voice lamp control device 113 by referring to the value of the elapsed time counter 352c provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262. As a result, it is not necessary to obtain a counter value from the elapsed time counter 352c of the timekeeping device 262 for each elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1331) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is available. Since it suffices to refer to the value of the counter means provided in, the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 60. In the above-described first embodiment, the time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262 on the basis of turning on the pachinko machine 10, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the timekeeping device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (timekeeping information) of 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and the identification is performed. It is configured to execute an effect according to the effect period.

  Further, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and the power supply is turned on. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. Is configured to be stored in.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock counter 223g that is updated by subtracting 1 from the counter value every 1 msec. The type of the effect period can be specified based on the counter value of.

  Further, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned off when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is set to an initial value of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to one hour). ing. When the power is cut off, this counter value is stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and is retained even during the power cut. When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e provided in the register 352 of the timer 262 is added to the counter value of the clock counter 223g. Then, the initial value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the period of the power interruption state.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration, in that a RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a time counter 223g and a time measuring device 262. In the register 352, a turning-off time storage area 352d and a counter value storage area 352e are provided instead of the input time storage area 352b. Further, some processes included in the startup process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding the other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 54, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided in the voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The RAM 223 is provided with a time counter 223g instead of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The clock counter 223g is used to specify the type of the effect period according to the counter value. The clock counter 223g subtracts 1 from the previous value each time the main process of the audio lamp controller 113 is executed by the counter updating process (S1341) executed in the main process of the audio lamp controller 113. After reaching 0, the loop counter returns to the initial value of 3599999. Since the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed every 1 msec, the clock counter 223g returns to the initial value every 3600 sec (that is, 1 hour). As for the relationship between the counter value of the clock counter 223g and the type of the effect period, when the counter value is in the range of 0 to 2999999 (the counter value corresponding to 50 minutes), it is determined to be the normal effect period and the counter value is 3000000 to 3000000. In the range of 3599999 (counter value corresponding to 10 minutes), it is determined that the special effect period. That is, every time the counter makes one round, a normal production period of 50 minutes and a special production period of 10 minutes come.

  In this way, if the player plays a game for one hour, the performance period is always switched to a different one, so that the player can feel a novelty by switching the production period. Therefore, even if a player plays a game for a long time, only the same effect is produced, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. Further, since the normal production period of 50 minutes and the special production period of 10 minutes are periodically repeated, the player can easily understand the time zone of the special production period and the time zone of the normal production period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game for each player, aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect mode suitable for the player's taste is performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The clock device 262 of the present embodiment has a register 352 as in the first embodiment, and the register 352 has a register table composed of a plurality of registers shown in FIG. The register table includes a clock register 352a, a cutoff time storage area 352d, and a counter value storage area 352e. That is, the timekeeping device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with a cutoff time storage area 352d and a counter value storage area 352e instead of the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The cutoff time storage area 352d is a register that stores time information (timekeeping information) measured by the timekeeping device 262 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The counter value storage area 352e is a register that stores the counter value of the clock counter 223g at that time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

  The disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing a part of the register table included in the register 352. The registers (timekeeping register 352a) assigned to the addresses 00H to 06H and the registers assigned to the addresses 0DH to 11H in the register table are the registers assigned to the addresses 0H to 6H and the addresses AH to EH in the first embodiment. The register and the register have the same configuration and function. On the other hand, the addresses 07H to 09H correspond to the outage time storage area 352d, and the addresses 0AH to 0CH correspond to the counter value storage area 352e. In the first embodiment, in the input time storage area 352b, the register for storing the second, the register for storing the minute, and the register for storing the time are assigned to the addresses 7H to 9H, respectively. The area 352d also has the same configuration.

  On the other hand, in the counter value storage area 352e, a power of 2 is associated with each bit. Specifically, the bits 0 to 7 of the register assigned to the address 0A are sequentially set to 2 0 (ie 1), 2 1 (ie 2), 2 2 (ie 4), 2 3 (ie 8), 2 4 (ie 16), 2 5 (ie 32), 2 6 (ie 64), 2 7 (ie 128), 2 to the 7th power (that is, 256) is associated with each other. Similarly, the bit 0 to bit 7 of the register assigned to the address 0B are associated with the 8th power of 2 (that is, 512) to the 15th power of 2 (that is, 32768), and the register assigned to the address 0C. 2 to 16th power (that is, 65536) to 2nd power of 23 (that is, 8388608). By using these three-byte storage areas, all values from 0 to 3599999, which are the values that the clock counter 223g can take, can be expressed.

  Each of the disconnection time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is used to set the initial value of the counter 223g. The details will be described later when the counter initial value setting process (S1231) executed in the startup process is described, but the power is cut off based on the time information stored in the cut time storage area 352d. Then, based on the period of the power interruption state, the number of times the counter value is updated is identified. Then, based on the specified counter value and the counter value stored in the counter value storage area 352e, the initial value of the clock counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

  Thus, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the time counter 223g is set to the initial value in consideration of the period in which the power was cut off. Of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, one of the pachinko machines 10 is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if it is necessary to do so, simply turn on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, and the counter value corresponding to the counter value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine that has not been turned off. Can be set as an initial value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the count value of the clock counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, the type of the effect period determined based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  In addition, when all the bits of the addresses 0AH and 0BH of the counter value storage area 352e are H, and the 0th to 5th bits of the address 0CH are H, the 6th bit, and the 7th bit are L, they are converted into the counter value of the clock counter 223g. Then, this corresponds to 4194303, which exceeds the maximum counter value of 3599999. That is, it is possible to express all possible values of the clock counter 223g without using the upper 2 bits of the register assigned to the address 0CH. Therefore, other information may be stored in the upper 2 bits of this address 0CH. As a result, the register table of the register 352 can be used efficiently, so that an increase in the capacity of the register 352 can be suppressed and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

<Regarding the control process in the third embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  Of the startup processing, in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212, the same processing as each of the processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup processing (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. In the startup process of the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the counter initial value setting process (S1231) is replaced with the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. To execute.

  That is, in the startup process in the third embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the counter initial value setting process is executed (S1231) and the interrupt permission is set (S1212). , Shift to main processing. This counter initial value setting process (S1231) is a process of setting an initial value to the counter value of the clock counter 223g, starting the update of the counter value starting from the turning on of the power source, and determining the counter value as the effect period. It is a process executed so that it can be used for.

  Here, details of the counter initial value setting process (S1231) will be described with reference to FIG. In the counter initial value setting process (S1231), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1521). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S1521: No), the clock counter 223g of the RAM 223 is set to the initial value 3599999 (S1522) and the special effect flag is turned off. Then (S1523), this process is terminated and the process returns to the startup process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erasing switch is on (S1521: Yes), the time measured when the pachinko machine 10 was previously turned off from the power failure time storage area 352d provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262. The time information measured by the device 262 is acquired (S1524). Next, information about the current time is acquired from the time register 352a of the time measuring device 262, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the power failure state based on the current time and the time information at the time of power failure acquired in the process of S1524. The period that has been set is calculated (S1525), and the counter value of the clock counter 223g stored when the pachinko machine 10 was previously turned off is acquired from the counter value storage area 352e (S1526). Then, based on the period of the power failure state calculated in the process of S1525 and the counter value acquired in the process of S1526, assuming that the update of the counter value of the clock counter 223g is continued without being in the power failure state, A value corresponding to the current counter value of the clock counter 223g is calculated (S1527), and the calculated counter value is set as an initial value of the clock counter 223g (S1528). Then, it is determined whether or not the set initial value of the clock counter 223g is a value corresponding to the special effect period, that is, whether or not the set initial value is within the range of 3000000 to 3599999 (S1529), If it is determined that it is not the special effect period (that is, the normal effect period) (S1529: No), the special effect flag is turned off (S1523), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the start-up process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1529 that the special effect period is in effect (S1529: Yes), the special effect flag is turned on (S1530), the present process ends, and the process returns to the startup process.

  As described above, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the clock counter 223g has the count value of the clock counter 223g when it is in the power cut state and the power cut. Since the initial value is set in consideration of the period in which the state has been maintained, a plurality of devices installed in the hall may be installed for reasons such as the need to replace the board due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection. Even when it becomes necessary to put one of the pachinko machines 10 into the power-off state, simply turning on the power again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on causes the power to be turned off. A counter value corresponding to the counter value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not existed can be set as an initial value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the count value of the clock counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, the type of the effect period determined based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. -S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and the same process as each process of S1319 are performed. Then, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is performed. Instead, the counter updating process (S1331) is executed. Further, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1316 is completed, the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment (FIG. 28) is followed by the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311). Instead, the processes of S1332 and S1333 are executed.

  That is, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), the counter update process is executed (S1341), and the command determination process is performed (S1313). The counter updating process (S1341) is a process for identifying the elapsed time from power-on based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g and determining the type of the effect period. Further, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1314: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process. Both the middle flags are turned on (S1316), the information indicating the current time updated by the timing register 352a of the timing device 262 is stored in the off time storage area 352d (S1332), and the counter value of the timing counter 223g is measured. The data is stored in the counter value storage area 352e of the device 262 (S1333). After that, the power-off process is executed (S1318), the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1319), and the process is infinitely looped. The processes of S1332 and S1333 include information used for setting the initial value of the counter value of the clock counter 223g when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. This is a process for storing it in the register 352 of the clock device 262 in order to retain it even during the power interruption state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 60, the counter updating process (S1331) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the counter updating process (S1331). The counter updating process is a process for updating the value of the clock counter 223g and determining the type of the current effect period based on the updated counter value.

  In this counter updating process, it is confirmed whether or not the counter value of the clock counter 223g is 0 (S3701). If the counter value is 0 (S3701: Yes), the clock counter 223g is set to the initial value 3599999. The setting is made (S3703), and the process proceeds to S3704. On the other hand, if the counter value is a value other than 0 (S3701: No), the counter value of the clock counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3704.

  In the process of S3704, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the clock counter 223g updated in the process of S3702 or S3703 is a value indicating the special effect period, that is, in the range of 3000000 to 3599999. Yes (S3704).

  When it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is the value indicating the special effect period (S3704: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is ON (S3709), and the special effect flag 223e. When it is determined that is ON (S3709: Yes), this process is terminated and returns to the main process of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3709: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3710), the special effect command is set (S3711), and the rear image is changed. A command is set (S3712), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not the value indicating the special effect period (that is, the value indicating the normal effect period) (S3704: No), the special effect flag 223e is ON. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3705: No), the present process is terminated and the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3705: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3706), the normal effect command is set (S3707), and the rear image change command is set ( (S3708), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since the special effect period or the normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) (see S1402 of FIG. 30). ), When selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clock information) of the timer 262 is checked to determine whether or not it is the special effect period. It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the processing for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the clock counter 223g whose counter value is updated each time the main processing is executed, and the counter value of the clock counter 223g is updated. It is configured such that the type of the effect period can be specified based on.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the information indicating the current time updated by the clock register 352a of the clock device 262 and the counter value of the clock counter 223g are transferred to the register 352 of the clock device 262. It is configured to remember. Then, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is set based on the time information when the power is turned off and the counter value of the clock counter 223g. A value corresponding to the current counter value of 223g of the clock counter 223g is set on the assumption that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is continuously updated without being in the power-off state. On the other hand, when the RAM erasing switch 122 is off when the power is turned on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is set to the initial value (that is, 3599999).

  As a result, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the count value of the clock counter 223g is set to the initial value of 3599999, so that the plurality of pachinko machines 10 can be operated. In the hall where is installed, the power is turned on all at once with the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off for the plurality of gaming machines, and all the counter values of the clock counter 223g of each pachinko machine 10 are initialized. The value is set to 3599999. Therefore, since the type of the effect period determined based on the count value of the clock counter 223g can be made the same in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game produces an effect in a different manner from the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable with being executed.

  Further, as described above, the timing device 262 operates based on the power supplied from the timing device power supply 263, which is a power source different from the power source of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state, when the power is turned off, the time information of the power-off state stored in the power-off time storage area 352d and the counter value storage area 352e are stored. The stored counter value of the clock counter 223g at the time when the power is cut off can be held.

  When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not set to the initial value 3599999 but becomes the power-off state. Since the counter value of the timekeeping counter 223g at that time and the period during which the power is off are set, a board replacement is required due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10, for example, an on-site inspection is performed. For this reason, even if it becomes necessary to turn off one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, the power is supplied with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on. Just by turning on again, the counter value corresponding to the counter value of the clock counter 223g of the gaming machine which has not been turned off is set as the initial value. Rukoto can.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the count value of the clock counter 223g from deviating from the other pachinko machines 10 that have not been turned off. As a result, the type of the effect period determined based on the counter value of the clock counter 223g can be made to match in each pachinko machine 10, so that the player playing the game is in an effect mode different from that of the other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress the feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed.

  In the present embodiment, in the clock counter 223g, the counter value corresponding to one hour is initialized and subtracted, but it is configured to be added, and the counter value for the corresponding time is added. Alternatively, it may be configured to make the determination. Alternatively, a plurality of counters may be provided and configured by 8-bit counters, and carry may be carried by the upper limit value. With this configuration, the number of bits of each counter can be reduced, and the counter can be easily configured. Further, the counter may be composed of a counter IC for timing or the like.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the time information (time information) is acquired from the time measuring device 262 on the basis of turning on the pachinko machine 10, and the type of the effect period is determined based on the acquired time information. It is configured to determine.

  More specifically, time information (timekeeping information) acquired from the timekeeping device 262 based on turning on the power is stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223, and the stored time information and the timekeeping device are stored. The elapsed time T is calculated from the current time information (timekeeping information) of 262. Then, based on the effect switching table 222b that defines the correspondence between the value of the elapsed time T and the effect period, it is determined whether the current effect period is the normal effect period or the special effect period, and the identification is performed. It is configured to execute an effect according to the effect period.

  Further, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is stored in the closing time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and the power supply is turned on. If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is replaced with the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. Is configured to be stored in.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the current effect period is determined based on the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 and the period information table in which the type of effect period is defined for each time. It is configured to determine.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a period information table 222c instead of the effect switching table 222b. That is, the RAM 223 is provided with a period information storage area 223h in place of the time information storage area 223f, and the register 352 of the clock device 262 is not provided with a throw-in time storage area 352b. Further, some processes included in the startup process (FIG. 26) and the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Regarding the other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The voice lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the ROM 222 and the RAM 223, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Then, the ROM 222 is provided with a period information table 222c in place of the effect switching table 222b provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with a period information storage area 223h instead of the time information storage area 223f provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The period information table 222c defines the type of the effect period for each time, and is used to identify the type of the current effect period by referring to the time information (time information) measured by the timing device 262. . Further, the period information storage area 223h is a region for storing the type of the effect period for each time defined in the period information table 222c, and the period of the ROM 222 in the table acquisition process (S1241) of the startup process (FIG. 64). The information defined in the information table 222c is read and stored.

  Here, details of the period information table 222c provided in the ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the period information table 222c. As shown in FIG. 62, the type of effect period is defined in the period information table 222c in association with the time. When the time indicates the normal effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display special effect flag 233k provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. Turns off. Then, based on these flags, the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 is performed in a normal effect mode. On the other hand, when the time indicates the special effect period, the special effect flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display special effect provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114. The flag 233k is turned on. Then, based on these flags, the effects performed by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are performed in a special effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the present embodiment, 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00 is a normal production period, and 10 minutes after that is from 10:00 to 10:10 minutes. It will be a special production period. Then, after 10 minutes as the special effect period has elapsed, the normal effect period is again set, and the normal effect period continues for 50 minutes until 11:00. After that, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are alternately repeated.

  In this way, except for 60 minutes from 9:00 to 10:00, if you are playing for 1 hour, it will always switch to a different production period, so you will feel a novelty to the player due to the change of production period Can be made. Therefore, even if a player plays a game for a long time, only the same effect is produced, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game. In addition, the special effect period of 10 minutes and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are periodically repeated, so that the player can easily understand the time period of the special effect period and the time period of the normal effect period. . Therefore, it is possible to start the game for each player, aiming at the effect period in which the effect of the effect mode suitable for the player's taste is performed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

  In FIG. 62, the correspondence between the time after 12:00 and the type of effect period (period information table) is omitted, but in reality, even after 12:00, a special time of 10 minutes is specified. The effect period and the normal effect period of 50 minutes are set to be alternately repeated. The time of the period information table 222c may be set to the minimum business closing time of the hall, and for example, the correspondence relationship between 9:00 and 22:45 may be defined. Further, the correspondence may be set in the range from 9:00 to 9:00 the next day. It should be noted that the types of effect periods are not necessarily limited to the two types of the normal effect period and the special effect period, and three or more types of effect periods in which the manners of the executed effects are different from each other may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the clock device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The timekeeping device 262 of the present embodiment has the register 352 as in the first embodiment, and the timekeeping register 352a provided in the register 352 of the first embodiment. It does not have 352b. That is, in the present embodiment, the register 352 is used only for the purpose of clocking the time, and is not used for holding information during the power interruption state as in the first embodiment. Since the other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  Of the startup processing, in each processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212, the same processing as each of the processing of S1201 to S1210 and S1212 of the startup processing (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. In the startup process of the third embodiment, when the process of S1210 is completed, the table acquisition process (S1241) is executed instead of the time acquisition process (S1211) of the startup process (FIG. 26) of the first embodiment. To do.

  That is, in the startup process of the fourth embodiment, after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set by the process of S1210 (S1210), the table acquisition process is executed (S1241), the interrupt permission is set (S1212), and the main Move to processing. The table acquisition process (S1241) is a process of acquiring the correspondence relationship (time period information table) between the time specified in the time period information table 222c of the ROM 222 and the type of the effect period, and is specified in the period information table 222c. This is a process executed so that the correspondence can be used to determine the effect period.

  Details of the table acquisition process (S1241) will be described with reference to FIG. In the table acquisition process (S1241), the correspondence (time period information table) between the time and the type of effect period defined in the period information table is read from the ROM 222 (S1531), and the read correspondence is stored in the period information storage area 223h. It is stored (1532). Then, the current time information (time information) 262 of the time measuring device is read, and the type of the current performance period is specified based on the time information and the correspondence stored in the period information storage area 223h. (S1533).

  In the process of S1534, it is determined whether or not the specific result of the process of S1533 is the special effect period (S1534). If it is determined that the special effect period is reached (S1534: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on. (S1535) This process is terminated and the process returns to the startup process. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1534, when it is determined that it is not the special effect period (that is, the normal effect period) (S1534: No), the special effect flag 223e is turned off (S1536) and this process is finished and started up. Return to processing.

  In this way, every time the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the correspondence defined in the period information table 222c is stored in the period information storage area 223h. Therefore, the correspondence between the time and the type of the effect period ( The same information can be referred to each time regardless of whether or not the power is cut off. Therefore, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if the need arises, if the power is turned on again, the time and the type of the effect period used by the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been cut off to determine the type of the effect period. The same correspondence relationship as (corresponding to the period information table) can be stored in the period information storage area 223h of the RAM 223. Therefore, since the type of effect period determined based on the correspondence relationship stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game can compare with other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed in different performance modes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Of the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113, in each processing of S1301 to S1310, S1312 to S1316, S1318, and S1319, S1301 of the main processing (see FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. -S1310, S1312-S1316, S1318, and the same process as each process of S1319 are performed. Then, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is completed, the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment (FIG. 28) is performed. Instead, the time confirmation process (S1351) is executed.

  That is, in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, after the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1310), the time confirmation process (S1351) is executed and the command determination process is performed (S1313). The time confirmation process (S1351) is performed on time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 and a correspondence relationship (time information table) between time and effect type stored in the time information storage area of the RAM 223. This is a process for determining the type of the current performance period based on the above.

  In the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the process corresponding to S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment is not performed. In the process of S1317 of the main process (FIG. 28) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment, the power-on time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 is provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262. This is a process performed to store the time information in the input time storage area 352b and to retain the time information even during the power failure state. When the power is turned on again with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, This is a process required to specify the elapsed time T based on the same time information as before. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the type of the effect period is determined using the time information itself measured by the timing device 262 without using the elapsed time T. It is not necessary to hold it in the disconnected state, and it is not necessary to perform the process corresponding to S1317.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the time confirmation processing (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The time confirmation process (S1351) is a process executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process of determining the type of the effect period based on the time information measured by the time measuring device.

  In this time confirmation process, the current time information measured by the time measuring device 262 is read (S3801), and the read time information and the correspondence relationship between the time and the type of the effect period stored in the period information storage area of the RAM 223 ( The period information table) is compared (S3802).

  Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether or not the current time indicates the special effect period (S3803), and when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is the value indicating the special effect period (S3803). : Yes), it is determined whether or not the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S3808), and when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is turned on (S3808: Yes), this processing is ended and the voice lamp control is performed. Return to the main processing of the device 113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3808: No), the special effect flag is turned on (S3809), the special effect command is set (S3810), and the rear image is changed. A command is set (S3811), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the process of S3803, when it is determined that the counter value of the clock counter 223g is not the value indicating the special effect period (that is, the value indicating the normal effect period) (S3803: No), the special effect flag 223e is ON. If it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3804: No), the present process is terminated and the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. Return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on (S3804: Yes), the special effect flag is turned off (S3805), the normal effect command is set (S3806), and the rear image change command is set ( (S3807), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since the special effect period or the normal effect period is indicated depending on whether the special effect flag 223e is on or off, the variation pattern selection process of the command determination process (see FIG. 30) (see S1402 of FIG. 30). ), When selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern table 222a based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main controller 110, the time information (clock information) of the timer 262 is checked to determine whether or not it is the special effect period. It is not necessary to determine whether the special effect flag 223e is on or not. Therefore, the processing for selecting the variation pattern mode can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to specify the type of the effect period based on the correspondence relationship between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h provided in the RAM 223 and the effect period. I am configuring.

  Further, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory that has not been backed up, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the information stored in the period information storage area 223h is cleared, but the nonvolatile memory The period information table 222c of the ROM 222, which is configured as described above, defines the correspondence between the time and the type of the effect period (period information table). Therefore, the period information defined in the period information table 222c when the power is turned on again. Only by storing the table in the period information storage area 223h, the type of the effect period can be determined based on the same period information table as that before the power failure state.

  Therefore, one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall is in the power-off state because, for example, the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed. Even if the need arises, if the power is turned on again, the time and the type of the effect period used by the other pachinko machine 10 that has not been cut off to determine the type of the effect period. The same correspondence relationship as (corresponding to the period information table) can be stored in the period information storage area 223h of the RAM 223. Therefore, since the type of effect period determined based on the correspondence relationship stored in the period information storage area 223h can also be matched in each pachinko machine 10, the player who is playing the game can compare with other pachinko machines 10. It is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness that the performance is being performed in different performance modes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the register 352 of the clock device 262 stores time information at the time of power-on or time information at the time of shifting to the power-off state, or is provided with a counter whose value is updated periodically. Not not. That is, since the clock device 262 is used only for acquiring the time of day, the capacity of the register 352 can be smaller than that of the other embodiments. Therefore, by reducing the storage capacity, it is possible to reduce the cost of the clock device 262.

  In the present embodiment, the period information table storage area 222c that defines the correspondence relationship between the time and the type of effect period (period information table) is provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The correspondence relationship between the time and the type of the effect period may be defined in the ROM 202, or the register 352 of the timing device 262 may store the correspondence relationship between the time and the type of the effect period. In this case, in the table acquisition process (S1231) of the start-up process (FIG. 64), the correspondence relationship (time period information table) between the time and the type of the effect period is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 or the register 352 of the clock device 262. It may be controlled so that it is stored in the engine information storage area 223g provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, when the correspondence relation between the time and the type of the effect period is stored in the register 352 of the time measuring device 262, the time information (time information) measured by the time measuring device 262 and the time and the effect period stored in the register 352 are stored. The timing device 262 may be configured to determine the current presentation period based on the correspondence relationship with the type (period information table). In this case, the time measuring device 262 is caused to perform the processes of S3801 to S3803 of the time confirmation process (S1351) executed in the main process (FIG. 66) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is currently in process. It suffices to notify whether the type of the effect period is the special effect period. With this configuration, the processing load on the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a presentation is made from time information (timekeeping information) measured by the timekeeping device 262 and a correspondence relationship (time period information table) between the time stored in the period information storage area 223h and the type of the effect period. Although the type of period is determined, instead of this, a counter means is provided in the voice lamp control device 113 so that the value is periodically updated when the power is turned on. The elapsed time T may be determined based on the value.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described first embodiment, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 when the power is cut off is stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the clock device 262. If the RAM erase switch 122 is stored and stored when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is stored in the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. It is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the player can set the time information, and the third symbol display device 81 or the like is notified of a predetermined notification mode based on the fact that the set time has come. Is configured.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is set in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 by the player operating the operation input unit 23. The set time storage area 223i for storing the set time information is added, and when it is determined that the time information is set in the set time storage area 223i, processing for notifying the notification mode is added. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it is present. Regarding the other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. The electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment is different from the electrical configuration in the first embodiment in that a set time storage area 223i is added to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the operation input unit is added to the voice lamp control device 113. 23 is electrically connected. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  The set time storage area 223i is an area where time information set by the player operating the operation input unit 23 is stored. When the time information is stored in the set time storage area 223i, the notification mode is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the set time has come. The time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In the initial setting, preset initial data is set. When this initial data is set, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to determine that the time information is not set in the set time storage area 223i (see FIG. 71). S4002: No).

  The operation input unit 23 is provided on the left side (not shown) of the frame button 22 so that the player can operate it, and the input operation unit and its setting so that the player can set an arbitrary time. And a display unit for confirming the time of the operation. The input operation unit is provided with respective operation units (push-down buttons) for setting hours, minutes, and seconds. When the player operates the operation unit, any one of the information (hour / minute / second) corresponding to the operated operation unit is added (for example, 1 hour for minute, 1 minute for second, and 1 minute for second). If there is one second), it is configured. When the upper limit values are added, the initial value is set to 0. Then, the operation input unit 23 is provided with a determination operation unit, and when the player operates the determination operation unit, the time currently displayed on the display unit is set in the pachinko machine 10 as the set time. It is configured.

  Specifically, the time information displayed on the display unit is stored in the set time storage area 223i in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the operation of the determination operation unit. Then, when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the set time has been set, a display command for displaying the character "set time is reached" on the third symbol display device 81 is set. To do.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation input unit 23 is configured to set the time, but the present invention is not limited to this. A mode in which the operation input unit 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, characters, symbols, characters, background color, etc.). ) May be provided so that the type of audio output from the audio output device 226, the lighting color or lighting mode of the lamp display device 227 can be set. You may comprise.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time set by the player is reached, the notification mode is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol set in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is set. The type may be set to be switched, or the type (mode) of the variation pattern table may be designated and switched. With this configuration, when the time set by the player comes, the variation pattern of the special symbol is switched, so that it is recognized that the set time has come without being noticed by other players while playing the game. be able to. In addition, the player can enjoy a predetermined fluctuation pattern at any time.

  Here, the change pattern table to be switched is set so that the change time and the change type (out, reach out, etc.) are not different from those instructed by the main controller 110, and the type of the displayed character, The background color, the sound effect, the notice effect, etc. are changed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time information set in the set time storage area 223i is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation input unit 23 inputs the information. The operation unit may be provided with an operation unit (press button) corresponding to initialization of time information. As a result, even if the player who has set the time information to be notified stops the game before the set time, the player who will play the next game will input the operation input unit 23. The time information can be initialized only by operating the operation unit.

  In addition, the storage area for storing the set time information (set time storage area 223i) is not provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, but is provided in the register 352 of the clock device 262 so that the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The set time information may be retained without being initialized even in the state. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to the reason that the board needs to be replaced due to a failure of the pachinko machine 10 or the on-site inspection is performed against the intention of the player who set the set time information. Even if it happens, it is possible to prevent the set time information from being initialized, so that it is possible to reliably notify the player based on the set time information set by the player.

<Regarding Control Process in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the notification time setting process (S1311 in FIG. 29) is replaced with the elapsed time confirmation process (S1311 in FIG. 29) of the main process (FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. 70 and the notification process (S1362 in FIG. 71) are added. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the notification time setting process (S1361) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the notification time setting process (S1361).

  In the notification time setting process (S1361 of FIG. 70), first, it is determined whether or not the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 has been operated (S3901). When it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 is not operated (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination operation unit of the operation input unit 23 has been operated (S3901: Yes), the time information input to the operation input unit 23 is stored in the set time storage area 223i (S3902), This processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, a notification process (S1362) which is one process of the main process (FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of this notification process (S1362).

  In the notification process (S1362), first, the clock data obtained by the clock device 262 is acquired from the clock register 352a, and the current time is read (S4001). It is determined whether time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002). When it is determined that the time information is not stored in the time information storage area 223i (S4002: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time information is stored in the time information storage area 223i, that is, the player has set the time (S4002: Yes), the time read in S4001 and the set time are It is determined whether they match (S4003). If it is determined that it is the set time (S4003), the notification command is set (S4004), and then this processing is ended.

  When this notification command is output to the display control device 114, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 performs the setting for displaying the character "Set time is reached!" On the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the time set by the player is configured to be set in the pachinko machine 10. At the set time, the player is notified of the notification mode indicating that the set time has come. As a result, the player can remember the schedule such as making a call or sending an email at the set time, and can easily determine the elapsed time from the start of the game.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2251 and S2252 are added to the command determination process (S2102 of FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. For other processing, the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a command determination process (S2102) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2102).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (S2102 of FIG. 72), when it is determined that the normal effect command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether the notification command is received (S2251). When it is determined that the notification command is received (S2251: Yes), the notification command process is executed (S2252).

  Here, the notification command process (S2252) will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this notification command processing (S2252).

  In the notification command process (S2252 in FIG. 73), first, the variable display data table corresponding to the character display “Set time has come!” Is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d. (S4101).

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4102).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4101, time data representing the display time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4103), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Are initialized to (S4104). Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the configuration of the present embodiment, by displaying the notification mode on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, the player can easily be notified that the set time has come. be able to.

  In addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the time set by the player is reached, a special variation pattern is selected or a specific background (for example, a red background) is selected. By doing so, it is possible to naturally recognize that the set time has come in the production of the game. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the set time has come while the player concentrates on the game.

  In addition, since the variation pattern can be switched at any time, the effect of the game can be changed depending on the elapsed game time, and the settings can be set according to the player, so that the player gets tired of the game early. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the notification pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time set by the player, but the time information (clock information) measured by the clock device 262 is always displayed. Incidentally, when the time set by the player is reached, a notification mode may be displayed in addition to the time information. With this, the player can grasp the current time even before the set time, and thus the player can be more sure to recognize that the set time has come.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 83. In the above-described first embodiment, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f of the RAM 223 when the power is cut off is stored in the input time storage area 352b provided in the register 352 of the clock device 262. If the RAM erase switch 122 is stored and stored when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the turn-on time storage area 352b is stored in the RAM 223 instead of the time when the power is turned on. It is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, when the power is turned on, the time information obtained from the turn-on time storage area 352b is compared with the current time information obtained from the clock device 262, and the date information is different. In this case, even when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on, the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b is not stored in the time information storage area 223f, and the time information acquired from the clock device 262 is stored. It is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be stored in the time information storage area 223f.

  In addition, in the sixth embodiment, a register 2353 is newly provided, and information of the variation pattern selected in the register 353, background image information selected when the power is turned off, information of a set gaming state, and the like are stored. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it is configured to be backed up when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding electrical configuration in sixth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration of the timing device 262. The other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the timing device 262 according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, a register 353 is added to the first embodiment. In addition, as shown in FIG. 75, the register 1 (352) has a RAM area (address 7) in which the input time storage area 352b is 1 byte, and MIN Alarm, HOUR Alarm, WEEK Alarm, DAY Alarm, and MIN Alarm of addresses A to E. It is composed of Timer Counter 0 and Timer Counter 1.

  The register 1 (352) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the loading time storage area 352b (see FIG. 10) configured with 3 bytes is set, but in the sixth embodiment, as the loading time storage area 352b, as shown in FIG. A 7-byte area is set. The addresses A to E are also set as alarm areas, and the addresses D to E are also set as counters.

  Of the 7-byte area of the input time storage area 352b, the RAM area (address 7) is a storage area for storing YEAR information (year data) clocked by the clock register 352a. The MIN Alarm (address A) stores MONTH information (month information) clocked by the clock register 352a, and the HOUR Alarm (address B) stores DAY information (date information) clocked by the clock register 352a. The WEEK Alarm (address C) stores the WEEK information (week information) clocked by the clock register 352a, and the DAY Alarm (address C) stores the HOUR information (time information) clocked by the clock register 352a. Is stored, Timer Counter 0 (address D) stores MIN information (minute information) clocked by the clock register 352a, and Timer Counter 1 (address E) stores SEC information (second) clocked by the clock register 352a. Information) is storedThe storage method is the same as the information set when the time is measured by the time register 352a described in the first embodiment, and each unit is assigned to each bit.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the dedicated storage area of the throw-in time storage area 352b is a 1-byte RAM storage area, and the other areas are areas normally used for the alarm function and the counter function. Configured to do so. With this configuration, the dedicated storage area can be made small, the area of the register 1 (352) can be made small, and the configuration can be inexpensive and the increase in size can be suppressed. Further, the storage area (storage capacity) of the input time storage area 352b can be enlarged, and detailed time information (information including date information) can be stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the register 2 (353) will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, the register 2 is composed of a 17-byte storage area indicated by addresses 0 to F. Address 0 is set as a storage area for storing milliseconds, and is set as a non-writable area. Address 1 is an area for storing seconds as SEC, address 2 is an area for storing minutes as MIN, address 3 is an area for storing hours as HOUR, and address 4 is a week as WEEK. Address 5 is an area for storing the day as DAY, address 6 is an area for storing the month as MONTH, address 7 is an area for storing the year as YEAR, and address 8 Is an area for storing minutes as an alarm function as MIN Alarm, address 9 is an area for storing time as an alarm function as HOUR Alarm, address A is as an alarm function as WEEK Alarm. The area for storing the week, DAY Alarm, stores the day as an alarm function. Area, address B is a counter area as Timer Counter 0, address C is a counter area as Timer Counter 1, address D is a storage area of a register as an Extension Register, and address E is a flag storage area as a Flag Register. Yes, the address F is a storage area of a register as a Control Register.

  The storage area from address 1 to address F is a storage area configured to be able to write various data. In addition to the predefined data type, it is also possible to store data within a set storage capacity. As described above, the register 2 can be used as a backup area by using the writable area to store various data from the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of power interruption.

  In the sixth embodiment, the register 2 includes a probability change notification counter storage area 353a, a background image information storage area 353b, a time saving number storage area 353c, an end data storage area 353d, a selected data storage area 353e, and another data storage area 353z. Each is set.

  In the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a, the backup process of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the value of the probability variation notification counter determined by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned off (see FIG. 80). FIG. 82, S1380) is a storage area stored in the process of S1382. The probability variation notification counter storage area 353a is set to addresses 1 and 2 of the register 2 (see FIG. 76). Here, the probability variation notification counter (not shown) stored in the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a is a counter that is set in the other storage area 223z of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the win / fail judgment result is a big hit. When the big hit A is selected, the number of lottery games (games in which special symbols are variably displayed and the result of judgment is notified) until the player is informed that the probability variation game state is reached after the big hit game is determined. Is a counter for. In the sixth embodiment, it is difficult to determine which one of the big hit A and the big hit B is won from the third symbol and the big hit game effect, and when the big hit A is won, the value of the probability variation notification counter is set. Is determined and set by a lottery from any of 1 to 99. After the jackpot game, the value of the probability variation notification counter is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol (3rd symbol) starts to change, and when the value of the probability variation notification counter becomes 0, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The color of the background image displayed is changed to red, the character "probability variation rush" is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the player is informed that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state (high probability gaming state). Is configured.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state after a big hit, and to expect the player to be playing in the probability variation gaming state. You can play games. In addition, since it is informed that the probability variation game state is at random, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh production.

  The value of the probability variation notification counter is backed up in the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a at the time of power interruption, and when the power is turned on again, the value stored in the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a is set as the initial value in the probability variation notification counter. By setting as above, even if the power is cut off, the player can be notified without changing the timing of the probability change notification.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the value of the probability variation notification counter is configured to be stored in the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a at the time of power interruption, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the probability variation notification counter is larger than 0 at the time of power interruption, that is, When the probability variation gaming state is in a state before being notified to the player, information indicating the probability variation non-reporting state is set in the probability variation notification counter storage area 353a, and the power is turned on again. In this case, the value of the probability variation notification counter may be determined to be in the probability variation non-informing state and re-lottered to set.

  The background image information storage area 353b is a storage area in which information regarding the background image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power interruption is stored. The background image information storage area 353b is set in the storage area of address 8 to address A of the register 2 (see FIG. 76).

  Information about background image data (background mode) set in the process of S1383 of the backup process (FIG. 82, S1380) in the main process (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the power is turned off. Is stored in the background image information storage area 353b. Further, when the power is turned on thereafter, based on the information about the background image stored in the background image information storage area 353b by the processing of S1265 of the various data setting processing (FIG. 79, S1260) in the startup processing (see FIG. 77). Then, the information of the background image to be set is set in the background mode storage area (not shown).

  As a result, even when the player presses the frame button 22 to select a favorite background image, when the power is restored, the game can be restarted with the background image. In addition, even if the player is not actually informed of the probability variation non-information in the probability variation non-informing state, it is possible to return while maintaining the non-information state. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable and a problem that the game is deteriorated due to the power being cut off.

  The time saving number storage area 353c is a storage area for storing the time saving number (or remaining time saving number) at the time when the power is cut off in the time saving game state. At this time, the short time count storage area 253c is set to the address B of the register 2 (see FIG. 76).

  The end data storage area 353d is a storage area that stores information (hereinafter, end information) indicating that all the data to be backed up is stored in the register 2 (see FIG. 76) when the power is turned off. This end data storage area 353d stores the end information as the last process of the backup process (FIG. 82, S1380) of the main process (see FIG. 80) executed when an electric power failure occurs. It can be used as information indicating that all necessary data is stored. Further, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the end information is stored in the end information storage area 353d in the processing of S1264 in the various effect data setting processing (FIG. 79, S1260) of the startup processing (see FIG. 77). It is configured to determine whether the data is stored, and if so, the data stored in the register 2 (see FIG. 76) is set in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 223, so that the backup is incomplete. In such a case, it is configured so as to prevent a problem that the productions are not matched with each other by not returning with halfway data.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the end information is not stored, the process of returning by the data set in the register 2 is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to return. In this case, in the backup processing (FIG. 82, S1380), it is preferable to set the information in the order of priority to be backed up to the register 2. Further, when returning, it is preferable that the stored data is discriminated, and if the data does not match, the data is adjusted so as to match and the data is restored.

  The selected data storage area 353e is a storage area in which statistical information based on statistical information is stored based on the type of the selected variation pattern and the result of its judgment. The selection data storage area 353e is set to the addresses D to E of the register 2 (see FIG. 76). Each time the variation pattern is determined by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, statistical information is created in the selection data storage area 353e based on the result of the judgment, and the statistical information is stored.

  As the statistical information, when a reach variation pattern is selected, the number of misses is statistically set for each reach display mode and set as the statistical information. This statistical information is used, for example, so that the percentage of the number of hits in the reach display mode is displayed during the round display during the jackpot game or when the reach display mode is displayed. To be By configuring the statistical information to be stored in the register 2, the information can be retained even after the power is turned off, and the statistical information over the days can be provided to the player.

  As a result, the player can more accurately determine the actual expectation of the reach effect and the like. Therefore, even if the reach display mode is selected infrequently in the case of winning, it is possible to confirm the event that is actually hitting, so that the player can play the game with the expectation of a big hit.

  The other data storage area 353z is a storage area in which other effect information, game states, etc. are stored when the power is turned off or during the game. The other data storage area 353z is set to the address F of the register 2.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 77 to 83, a control process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the first embodiment. Illustration and description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  A control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 83. The control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment in the startup process (FIG. 26), The main processing (FIG. 28) and the command determination processing (FIG. 30, S1312) are changed. With respect to the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted, and only changed points will be described.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. In the startup process (see FIG. 77) of the sixth embodiment, the time acquisition process (FIG. 27, S1211) is different from the startup process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26) in the time acquisition process 2 (see FIG. 78). , S1250), and various effect data setting processing (FIG. 79, S1260) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S1210 of the start-up processing (see FIG. 77) is executed, the time acquisition processing 2 (S1250 of FIG. 78) is executed. Here, the time acquisition process 2 (S1250) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time acquisition process 2 (S1250) which is one of the startup processes (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the time acquisition process 2 (S1250), first, the current time information measured by the clock device 262 is acquired (S1251). As the time information acquired here, information of year / month / day / hour / minute / second is acquired. The time information stored in the input time storage area 352a is acquired (S1252). If time information is not stored in the input time storage area 352a, default information is acquired. In this embodiment, the default information is composed of 0 data.

  It is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1253). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1253: Yes), it is determined whether the dates of the time information acquired in S1251 and S1252 match (S1254). Here, if the date information does not match by discriminating the date information, the RAM erasing switch 122 is erroneously operated, or if one day of business is over and the next business starts, the pachinko machine is opened. Since the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on in order to perform the reset process of the machine 10, if the throw-in time information is backed up, a problem occurs that the throw-in time information does not match with other pachinko machines 10, but in the present embodiment. If they do not match, the time information newly acquired from the timing device 262 is configured to be set as the input time information, so that the problem can be suppressed.

  In the process of S1254, when it is determined that the date information matches (S1254: Yes), the time information stored in the input time storage area 352a of the timekeeping device 262 is set in the time information storage area 223f (S1255). Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, when the date information is the same, the power is turned on again within the same business, so the backup time information is set in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is possible to match the input time information with that of 10 and suppress the problem that the effect is shifted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S1253: No) or when the date information does not match (S1254: No), the time information newly acquired from the clock device 262 (by the process of S1251). The acquired time information) is set in the time information storage area 223f (S1256). The time information acquired from the clock device 262 is set in the input time storage area 352a (S1257). Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the same time information is stored in the input time storage area 352a based on the time information newly acquired from the timing device 262 being set in the time information storage area 223f. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing to be performed when the power is cut off. Further, the input time information can be set with certainty.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. After the time acquisition process 2 (FIG. 78, S1250) is executed, various effect data setting processes are executed (S1260). The various effect data setting processing (S1260) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the contents of the various effect data setting processing (S1260).

  In the various effect data setting processing (FIG. 79, S1260), first, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S1261). When it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S1261: Yes), the current time information is acquired from the clock device 262 (S1262). It is determined whether the acquired current time information is within business hours (9:00 to 23:00 in this embodiment) (S1263). When it is determined that the acquired time is within the business hours (S1263: Yes), it is determined whether the end data is stored in the end data storage area 353d (S1264). When it is determined that the end data is stored in the end data storage area 353d (S1264: Yes), various data stored in the register 2 (see FIG. 76) is set in the corresponding RAM 223 (S1265).

  The display command is set based on each data acquired from the register 2 (see FIG. 76) (S1266). Then, the process of S1267 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1261, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off (S1261: No), or if it is determined that it is out of business hours in the process of S1263 (S1263: No), or the process of S1264. When it is determined that the end data is not stored in (S1264: No), the process of S1267 is executed. In the process of S1267, the time to execute the special effect is set as alarm information in the alarm information storage area (background information storage area 353b) of the register 2 based on the data set in the time information storage area 223f (S1267).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the time for executing the special effect (every 1 hour from the power-on time) is set as the alarm information based on the set closing time information, so that the pachinko machine 10 performs the special effect. It is possible to reduce the processing for managing the time to execute. The clock device 262 is configured to output an alarm signal to the voice lamp control device 113 at the time set as the alarm information.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the end data is not stored, the backed up data is not set in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 223, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 0 data is set. It may be configured such that the storage area in which the data is stored is determined and the data in the storage area that is two storage orders before the backup order with respect to the storage area in which 0 data is set is set in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 223. The reason why the backup order is the second previous backup order set for 0 data is because it is not possible to determine whether the backup order of the previous backup order set for 0 data has been completed correctly. This is because it is possible to determine up to the second previous order as data for which backup has been completed correctly.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing. The main process (see FIG. 80) in the sixth embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment in that the elapsed time confirmation process (FIG. 29, S1311) is the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (FIG. 81). , S1370) and a backup process (FIG. 82, S1380) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (S1370) which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 80) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of this elapsed time confirmation processing 2 (S1370).

  In the elapsed time confirmation process 2 (FIG. 81, S1370), first, it is determined whether or not an alarm signal is received from the clock device 262 (S1371). Here, the alarm signal is output at a time 60 minutes after the power is turned on and a time 5 minutes thereafter. After that, similarly, it is output at the time when 60 minutes have passed after 5 minutes have passed, and then repeatedly at the time when 5 minutes have passed. This alarm time is set in each alarm area of the timekeeping means based on the time when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  If it is determined that the alarm signal has not been received (S1371: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the alarm signal is received (S1371: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect flag is on (S1372). When it is determined that the special effect flag is on (S1372: Yes), the special effect flag is set to off (S1373). Then, the normal effect command is set (S1374). A back image change command is set (S1375). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, when the alarm signal is received and it is determined that the special effect flag is ON, the received alarm signal is a signal output at the timing indicating the end of the special effect, and thus the special effect is generated. The process of setting end is executed (corresponding to the processes of S1373 to S1375).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1372, when it is determined that the special effect flag is off (S1372: No), the special effect flag is set to on (S1376). A special effect command is set (S1377). A background image change command is set (S1378). Then, this process is completed.

  Here, when the special effect flag is off when the alarm signal is received, it is determined that the alarm signal indicating the start of the special effect period is received, and the process of setting the special effect is performed. It is executed (corresponding to the processing of S1376 to S1378).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alarm signal is output from the timekeeping means at the start timing and the end timing of the special effect to notify the voice lamp control device 113, so that the voice lamp control device 113 operates in the special effect period. The management process can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Although the present embodiment is configured to determine whether an alarm signal has been received, when the alarm signal is received, the processing of the contents of this elapsed time confirmation processing (FIG. 81, S1370) is forced by an INT interrupt. It may be configured to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load of the process of monitoring whether the alarm signal has been received, and reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. When it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information (S1314: Yes), the backup process is performed after the process of S1316 is performed (S1380). This backup process (S1380) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of this backup process (S1380). In the backup process (FIG. 82, S1380), first, an initialization process is performed to clear each storage area (353a to 353e, 353z) of the register 2 (353) with 0 data which is an initial value (S1381). As a result, the data set in the register 2 can be initialized when the power is cut off, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the data that has been set until then remains unnecessarily at the time of the power cut. It is determined whether the value of the probability change notification counter (not shown) is larger than 0 (S1382). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation notification counter is greater than 0 (S1382: Yes), the value of the probability variation notification counter is stored in the probability variation notification counter storage area of the register table 2 (S1383). Then, the process of S1384 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S1382, when it is determined that the value of the probability change notification counter is 0 (S1382: No), the process of S1384 is executed.

  In the process of S1384, information about the current background mode (type information of the background image displayed on the third symbol display device 81) is stored in the background image information storage area of the register table 2 (S1384). It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving gaming state (S1385). When it is determined that the current game state is the time saving game state (S1385: Yes), the current time saving number is stored in the time saving number storage area of the register table 2 (S1386). Then, the process of S1387 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1385, when it is determined that the time saving game is not in progress (S1385: No), the processing of S1387 is executed.

  In the process of S1387, each other data is stored in the corresponding area of the register 2 (S1387). The end data is set in the end data storage area of the register 2 (S1388). Then, this process is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to back up the various data set in the pachinko machine 10 in the register 2 of the timing device 262 when the power is cut off. As a result, even the voice lamp control device 113 having no backup power supply can back up. In addition, by storing the value of the probability variation notification counter as the data to be backed up, the state concealing the probability variation game state in terms of performance can be maintained even if the power is turned on again. Furthermore, since the value of the back-up probability variation notification counter is set again after the power is turned on again, after the special symbol is variably displayed by the number of times of the counter value determined by the lottery, the probability variation game state is displayed to the player. You can inform that there is.

  In addition, since the background information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is backed up, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the background at the time of power interruption. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a feeling of strangeness even when the power supply is momentarily cut off. Further, in the case of the time saving game state, since the time saving number is also stored in the end data in the last process, it is possible to determine whether or not the backup is normally completed.

  Here, each data of the backup set in the backup process (FIG. 82, S1380) is configured in units of 8 bits, and the data set so as not to be the same as the 0 data which is the initial value is set. Has been done. Specifically, in the process of backing up the time saving number in S1385, the head bit is set to 0 in the time saving game state, and the remaining time saving number is set by the remaining 7 bits. On the other hand, if it is not the time saving game state, the first bit is set to 1 and the remaining 7 bits are set to 0 data. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the hour / hour count storage area 353c from becoming 0 data even when the hour / hour game is not being played, that is, even when the remaining hour / hour count is 0. . As described above, also in the other storage areas, with respect to the data which becomes the 0 data, the leading bit is set to 1 so that the data can be prevented from becoming the 0 data.

  With such a configuration, even when the end data configured in the present embodiment is not set, the stored data set with 0 data is discriminated and the data stored in the order two before that is determined. It may be configured to determine that the data has been properly backed up. As a result, it is possible to discriminate correctly backed up data and execute the recovery setting after the power is cut off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, regarding the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420) which is one process in the command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment. explain. The command determination processing (not shown) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment in that the variation pattern selection processing (FIG. 31, S1402) is performed. The only difference is that the processing is changed to the processing 2 (FIG. 83, S1420), and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process 2 (S1420). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 83, S1420), first, the variation start flag is set to ON (S1421). It is determined whether the special effect flag is on (S1422). When it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1422: Yes), the variation pattern for the special effect period is extracted from the received command (S1423). Then, the process of S1425 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag is off (S1422: No), the variation pattern of the normal effect period is extracted from the received command (S1424). Then, the process of S1425 is executed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 specifies the judgment result, the fluctuation time, and the rough fluctuation mode (reach, non-reach, stray, etc.). In the voice lamp control device 113, a variation selection table is set for each of the gaming states (normal gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time saving gaming state, etc.). In this fluctuation pattern selection table, detailed fluctuation pattern contents are determined by the fluctuation pattern command received from main controller 110 and the selection counter selected by voice lamp controller 113. Further, in the case of the normal game state, during the special effect period, the change pattern is selected from the change pattern selection table dedicated to the special effect period.

  That is, even if the same variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 due to a difference in the game state, whether it is a special effect period, or a difference in the selection counter, the variation selected by the voice lamp control device 113. The contents of the embodiment are different. Even if the detailed contents are different, the selected fluctuation time is the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110.

  In the process of S1425, data is acquired from the selected data storage area of the register 2 (S1425). Statistical data is created based on the acquired data in the selected data storage area and the data based on the variation pattern extracted in S1423 or S1424 and stored in the selected data storage area (S1426).

  Note that the statistical data created in the process of S1426 is data in which the number of times whether or not the hit / miss judgment result is a hit or a miss is statistic for each type of the extracted fluctuation pattern. For example, although a case of a big hit and a miss is set for the super reach A, the number of times of the super reach A of the big hit and the number of times of the super reach A of the miss are respectively stored. The statistical data configured in this manner is displayed in a round display during a jackpot game, for example, when Super Reach A starts to be displayed in a variable manner, as a notice display, the jackpot in Super Reach A so far. The probability of doing is displayed based on the statistical data.

  With this configuration, the player can be informed of the actual jackpot expectation when each variation pattern is displayed. Further, even if the variation pattern is hard to be actually selected in the case of a big hit, it is possible to give the player an expectation for a big hit by being able to notify the actual big hit result and the like.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, in the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the audio lamp control device 113 and the timing device 262 are electrically connected, and based on the information acquired from the timing device 262, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 produces a presentation period. However, instead of this, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 electrically connects the main control device 110 and the time measurement device 262, and based on the information acquired from the time measurement device 262, the rendering period. The type may be determined. In this case, main controller 110 may include the information on the type of the effect period in the command output to audio lamp controller 113. The processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced by causing the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to determine the type of the presentation period instead of the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the first and third embodiments described above, a storage area is provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262, and the information stored in the RAM 223 is stored when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power-off state. Thus, the information is configured to be retained even during the power failure state, but instead of this, a storage unit that can retain the stored information even when the pachinko machine 10 is in the power failure state, It may be provided separately from the timing device 262. A flash memory or the like corresponds to a specific example of the storage means. As a result, the storage area of the register 352 of the clock device 262 can be reduced, and the cost of the clock device 262 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on, the time information stored in the time information storage area 223f is provided in the register 352 of the timekeeping device 262 based on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off. It was determined whether to store the time information stored in the input time storage area 352b or the time information measured by the clock device 262 (S1501 of the time acquisition process (S1211)). The time information stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined based on the signals output from the hall computers connected to the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Specifically, the hall computer is configured to be able to determine whether or not the power of each of the connected pachinko machines 10 is on, and the power of each pachinko machine 10 is turned off when the power of each pachinko machine 10 is off. When it is determined that they have been turned on (that is, when it is determined that all the pachinko machines 10 have been turned on at the same time), a signal indicating that the power has been turned on is output to each of the pachinko machines 10 that have been turned on. To configure. On the other hand, among the respective pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer, only one of the pachinko machines 10 is turned off, and the other pachinko machine 10 is determined to be turned on. When it is determined that the power has been turned on to the one pachinko machine 10 that has been turned off, a signal indicating that the power has been independently turned on is output to the one pachinko machine 10 that has been turned on. To configure. Then, the time information to be stored in the time information storage area 223f may be determined according to the type of the signal output from the hall computer when the power is turned on.

  Similarly, in the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time counter 352c is initialized depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is on or off (elapsed time counter initialization process ( Instead of S1511) of S1221), it may be determined whether or not to initialize the elapsed time counter 352c according to the type of signal output by the hall computer. In the third embodiment, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g is determined according to whether the RAM erasing switch 122 is on or off (S1521 of counter initial value setting process (S1231)). ) Alternatively, the counter value to be set in the clock counter 223g may be determined according to the type of signal output by the hall computer.

  As a result, the power can be turned on while holding the information stored in the RAM 203 before the power is cut off. Therefore, even if the pending ball is turned off in the state where it remains, or even if it is turned off during the high probability state of the special symbol, it remains based on the power being turned on again. Since it is possible to prevent the reserved ball from disappearing or shifting from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot multiple times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time right-of-use property, a three-time right-of-use property, etc.) May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  A specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused is equipped with a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols, and is not provided with a handle for ball launching. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to the operation of, for example, the stop switch, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  A pachinko machine in which some or all of the above-described respective embodiments are combined may be used.

  Below, in addition to the pachinko machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Feature A group> (The power-on time is stored when the power is turned on, and the storage of the power-on time is avoided if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on.)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and time measuring means capable of timing even in a power-off state in which power supply to a gaming machine is cut off. In the machine, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping unit, a timekeeping information storage unit in which the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored, and the timekeeping information storage unit based on power-on. Based on the timekeeping information storage control means that can be controlled to acquire and store the timekeeping information from the timekeeping means by the acquisition means, and the timekeeping information stored by the timekeeping information storage control means Based on the elapsed time determining means for determining the elapsed time and the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determining means, the effect mode displayed by the display control means is specified. The effect switching determination means for determining whether or not to switch to the output mode, the condition determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition determination means, the predetermined condition If it is determined that the time is satisfied, avoiding that the timekeeping information newly acquired by the timekeeping means by the acquisition means is prevented from being stored in the timekeeping information storage means by the timekeeping information storage control means A gaming machine A1 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is acquired by the acquisition means, and the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means. Then, the timekeeping information storage control unit controls the timekeeping information storage unit to acquire and store the timekeeping information from the timekeeping unit by the acquisition unit based on the power-on, and the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage unit is stored in the timekeeping information storage unit. Based on this, the elapsed time determining means determines the elapsed time that has elapsed since the power was turned on. Further, based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to the specific mode, and based on the power-on, a predetermined value is determined. The condition determining means determines whether or not the condition is satisfied. Here, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timekeeping information newly acquired from the timekeeping means by the acquiring means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means. Is stored by the avoiding means. With this, if a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade are turned on at the same time without satisfying the prescribed conditions, the prescribed conditions are satisfied even if one gaming machine is turned off. If the power is turned on again in this state, the avoidance means avoids overwriting the time information storage means with the time information, so that the timing of switching to a specific presentation mode is shifted due to the power interruption or the like. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine A1, the timekeeping means is capable of storing predetermined storage information, and is provided with a power interruption storage means capable of holding the storage information even in the power interruption state. The timekeeping information storage control means is provided in the power interruption state. In this case, the gaming machine A2 is controlled to store the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means in the power interruption storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, in the timing means, the predetermined storage information is stored by the power interruption storage means capable of holding the storage information even in the power interruption state. Here, in the time information storage means, when the power is cut off, the time information stored in the time information storage means is controlled to be stored in the power cut storage means. As a result, even when one gaming machine is put into the power-off state, the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means is retained by being stored in the power-cutting storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, just refer to the timekeeping information that is maintained even during the power-off state, and match the timing of switching to a specific performance mode with another gaming machine that has not been turned off. You can Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the timing of switching to a specific presentation mode is shifted, and it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling for the player.

  The gaming machine A2 is provided with a memory judgment means capable of judging whether or not the time cut information is stored in the power interruption storage means, and the time information storage control means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied. And the time determination information is stored in the power interruption storage means, the time determination information stored in the power interruption storage means is stored in the time information storage means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the storage determination means determines whether or not the time information is stored in the power interruption storage means. Then, when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage determination means determines that the time cut information is stored in the power cut storage means, the time count stored in the power cut storage means. The information is stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means. As a result, when the power is turned on while the predetermined condition is satisfied, even though the time cut information is not stored in the power cut storage means, the time cut information is transferred from the power cut storage means to the time information storage means. Since it is possible to suppress that the inappropriate timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, the switching determination means determines whether or not to switch to the specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the timing of switching to a specific presentation mode is shifted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine A3, the timekeeping information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition determination means determines that the timekeeping information is not stored in the power interruption storage means. A gaming machine A4, characterized in that, when judged by the means, the acquisition means controls the newly acquired time information to be stored in the time information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the storage determination means determines that the timing information is not stored in the power interruption storage means, the acquisition means newly acquires. The time information storage control means controls the time information to be stored in the time information storage means. As a result, when the power is turned on simultaneously for a plurality of gaming machines whose timing information is not stored in the power interruption storage means due to, for example, the initial state of shipment, the power is erroneously satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Even if is input, the timekeeping information newly acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate timing information from being stored in the timing information storage means, and the switching determination means from determining whether or not to switch to a specific presentation mode based on the inappropriate timing information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to a specific effect mode shifts for each gaming machine, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, in the state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode. It is to determine whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode. When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notification unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the effect mode after switching. The game machine A5 is for performing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time the production mode is switched, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine A5, the display control means is in a state in which an effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means. An amusement machine A6, characterized by comprising state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the effect is in a state of being executed.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5. That is, since it is only necessary to specify the effect mode based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is not necessary for the display control means to acquire the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means to determine the present effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

The gaming machine A6 is provided with control means for controlling the game, and the display control means is
Display specifying means for specifying a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means from among a plurality of display modes, and for drawing an image to be displayed in each of the display types. From the specified information storage means, specified information storage means for storing specified information for defining drawing information indicating necessary information for each screen and the specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the display specifying means are selected from the specified information storage means. A gaming machine A7, characterized in that the selecting means selects the specified information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means from the specified information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6. That is, when executing the effect, the display control means does not judge all the image information necessary for drawing the image for each screen, but the display control means stores the specified information in the specified information storage means. Since it is only necessary to expand or transfer the image information in accordance with the above, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced and an image without any frame failure can be surely displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic B group> (stored in an empty address bit other than RAM)
In a gaming machine having display means capable of displaying an effect mode and display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, timekeeping capable of timing even in a power-off state in which power supply to the game machine is cut off Means and, every time the timekeeping means updates the timekeeping information, the timekeeping information updated by a part of the bits of the first storage area formed of a plurality of bits in a predetermined storage area is stored However, the first storage means capable of holding the stored information, the second storage means capable of storing the information stored in the first storage means, and the first storage based on the power-on of the second storage means Based on the storage control means for controlling so as to acquire and store the timekeeping information stored in the area and the timekeeping information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means, the elapsed time after the power is turned on is calculated. Elapsed time judgment Means, an effect switching determination means for determining whether to change the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the elapsed time determined by the elapsed time determination means, and power-on And a condition determining unit capable of determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, the storage control unit stores the timekeeping information stored in the second storage unit when the power is cut off. When the power interruption information is controlled to be stored in at least a bit of the first storage area in which the timekeeping information is not stored, and the condition determining means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine B1 for controlling to store the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storage means in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, each time the timekeeping means capable of timing even in the power-off state updates the timekeeping information, it is updated with a part of the bits of the first storage area formed of a plurality of bits in the predetermined storage area. The timekeeping information is stored by the first storage means. The information stored in the first storage means is retained even in the power cut state. Then, the information stored in the first storage means is stored in the second storage means, and the timekeeping information stored in the first storage area is acquired and stored in the second storage means when the power is turned on. It is controlled by the storage control means. Further, based on the timekeeping information stored in the second storage means by the storage control means, the production switching determination means determines whether or not the production mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific production mode. Based on the input, the condition determining means determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the power is cut off, the storage control means stores the power cut time information according to the time count information stored in the second storage means in at least a bit of the first storage area where the time count information is not stored. When the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time measuring information based on the power interruption information stored in the first storing means is stored in the second storing means. It is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, if a plurality of gaming machines are turned on at the same time without satisfying a predetermined condition, even if one gaming machine is turned off, the power is turned off. Based on the above, the first storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power cut state stores the power cut time information, and holds the power cut time information even in the power cut state. Therefore, when the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timekeeping information based on the power interruption time information that was held even during the power interruption state can be stored in the second storage means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the timing of switching to the presentation mode is shifted due to being turned off. In addition, when the power interruption information is stored in the first storage means, the information can be stored not only in the storage area in which no information is stored but also in a part of the first storage area. Can be used efficiently, and the information can be accurately stored even if the size of the information at the time of power interruption becomes large. Therefore, more detailed power interruption information can be stored in the first storage means, so that the error in the timing of switching to the specific effect mode can be further reduced. As described above, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage means is composed of a plurality of bits, and has a power-off time information storage area capable of storing power-off time information in all bits, and the storage control means sets the power-off state to In this case, the power interruption time information corresponding to the time measurement information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power interruption time information storage area and the bit in the first storage area where the time measurement information is not stored. A gaming machine B2 characterized by being controlled as follows.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the first storage means, the power failure information is composed of a plurality of bits and is stored in the power failure information storage area capable of storing the power failure information in all bits. Then, when the power is cut off, the power cut time information corresponding to the time count information stored in the second storage means is stored in the power cut time information storage area and the bit in which the time count information in the first storage area is not stored. Storage is controlled by the storage control means. As a result, the power failure information can be stored in the power failure information storage area and the bit not used for timing in the first storage area, so that the first memory can be stored as compared with the case where the power failure information is stored in only one of them. The means can be used efficiently. Therefore, the data amount of the power failure information that can be stored in the first storage unit can be increased, so that even if the size of the power failure information increases, the information can be accurately stored, and more Detailed power interruption information can be stored in the first storage means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the error in the timing of switching to the specific effect mode, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a storage judgment means capable of judging whether or not the power-off information is stored in the first storage means is provided, and the storage control means has a predetermined condition determined by the condition judgment means. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, and when the storage determination unit determines that the power failure information is stored in the first storage unit, the power failure information stored in the first storage unit A gaming machine B3, which controls to store the timekeeping information based on the above in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage determination means determines whether or not the power failure information is stored in the first storage means. Then, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the storage determining means determines that the power interruption information is stored in the first storage means, the information is stored in the first storage means. The storage control means controls the timekeeping information based on the power interruption information to be stored in the second storage means. As a result, when the power is turned on while the predetermined condition is satisfied, even though the power failure information is not stored in the first storage means, the second storage is performed based on the inappropriate information. Since it is possible to prevent the timekeeping information from being stored in the means, the inappropriate timekeeping information is stored in the timekeeping information storage means, and it is determined whether or not to switch to the specific mode based on the inappropriate timekeeping information. It is possible to suppress the judgment made by the means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the timing of switching to a specific presentation mode is shifted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine B3, the timekeeping information storage control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on power-on, and the condition determination means determines that the first storage means does not store the power interruption time information. A gaming machine B4, characterized in that, when judged by the memory judging means, the timekeeping information updated by some bits of the first memory area is stored in the second memory means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first storage area is determined when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the storage determination means determines that the power-off information is not stored in the first storage means. The timekeeping information updated by a part of the bits is stored in the second storage means by the timekeeping information storage control means. As a result, for example, due to an initial state of shipment, when a plurality of gaming machines for which power failure information is not stored in the first storage means are simultaneously turned on, a predetermined condition is erroneously satisfied. Even if the power is turned on in step 2, the bit-timed and updated timing information of a part of the first storage area can be stored in the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate timing information from being stored in the second storage means, and the switching determination means from determining whether or not to switch to the particular effect mode based on the inappropriate timing information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to a specific effect mode shifts for each gaming machine, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, in the state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode. It is to determine whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode. When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notification unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the effect mode after switching. The game machine B5 is characterized by executing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time the production mode is switched, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine B5, the display control unit is in a state in which an effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification unit. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the gaming machine B6 is provided with a state information storage unit that stores information indicating whether or not the effect is in a state of being executed.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. That is, since it is only necessary to specify the effect mode based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is not necessary for the display control means to acquire the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means to determine the present effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, a control means for controlling the game is provided, and the display control means specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means from a plurality of display modes, A definition information storage unit that is provided for each of the plurality of display types and stores definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary to draw an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display identification unit. Selecting means for selecting the specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the specified information storage means from the specified information storage means, and the selecting means selects the specified information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine B7 selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when executing the effect, the display control means does not judge all the image information necessary for drawing the image for each screen, but the display control means stores the specified information in the specified information storage means. Since it is only necessary to expand or transfer the image information in accordance with the above, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced and an image without any frame failure can be surely displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic C group> (A counter is provided in the RTC to count the elapsed time from power-on)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and time measuring means capable of timing even in a power-off state in which power supply to a gaming machine is cut off. In the machine, based on the acquisition means capable of acquiring the timekeeping information that the timekeeping means measures, and the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition means, the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode. The effect switching determination means for determining whether or not, the condition determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and the condition determination means, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C1 characterized by comprising an initialization means for initializing the timekeeping information for the timekeeping means when it is determined to be present.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the time information obtained by the time measuring means is acquired by the acquiring means. Then, based on the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to a specific effect mode. Further, based on the power-on, the condition judging means judges whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, depending on the condition determining means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is initialized by the initialization means. As a result, if the power is turned on at the same time for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade while the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is simultaneously initialized by the initialization means. Since the timing is newly started at the same timing, it is possible to match the timing information which the timing means of each gaming machine clocks. Then, since the determination as to whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode is made based on the timekeeping information, if the time information of each gaming machine is the same, there is a problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is shifted. Can be suppressed. Therefore, in a plurality of gaming machines, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the timings of switching to the specific effect modes being shifted from each other.

  In the gaming machine C1, initialization avoidance means for avoiding initialization of the timing information measured by the timing means by the initialization means when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine C2 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization avoidance means avoids the initialization of the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means. With this, for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade, power is turned on all at once in a state where a predetermined condition is satisfied, and after the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means of each gaming machine is adjusted, one game is played. Even if the machine is turned off, if the power is turned on again when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the initialization of the timekeeping information by the initialization avoiding means can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means from deviating from the timekeeping information measured by the other timekeeping means of the gaming machine which is not in the power-off state. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by shifting the timings of switching to the specific effect mode based on each other.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the time measuring means includes a time measuring means for measuring a time and an elapsed time measuring means for measuring an elapsed time, and the initialization means measures the elapsed time measured by the elapsed time measuring means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being initialized.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, it is possible to grasp the elapsed time since the power is turned on while grasping the current time.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, in the state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode. It is to determine whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode. When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notification unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the effect mode after switching. The game machine C4 is for performing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time the production mode is switched, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the display control means is in a state where an effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notification means. A gaming machine C5, characterized in that the gaming machine C5 is provided with state information storage means for storing information indicating whether or not the effect is in a state of being executed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, since it is only necessary to specify the effect mode based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is not necessary for the display control means to acquire the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means to determine the present effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine C5 is provided with a control means for performing control relating to the game, and the display control means specifies a display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means from a plurality of display modes, A definition information storage unit that is provided for each of the plurality of display types and stores definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary to draw an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display identification unit. Selecting means for selecting the specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the specified information storage means from the specified information storage means, and the selecting means selects the specified information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine C6 selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5. That is, when executing the effect, the display control means does not judge all the image information necessary for drawing the image for each screen, but the display control means stores the specified information in the specified information storage means. Since it is only necessary to expand or transfer the image information in accordance with the above, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced and an image without any frame failure can be surely displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic D group> (Determine the initial value of the counting means based on the period when the power is off)
A game having display means capable of displaying an effect mode, display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, and time measuring means capable of timing even in a power-off state in which power supply to a gaming machine is cut off. In the machine, counting means for updating the count value at every predetermined cycle based on power-on, and whether to change the effect mode displayed by the display control means to a specific effect mode based on the count value of the counting means. Production switching determination means capable of determining whether or not, acquisition means capable of acquiring the timing information clocked by the timing means, timing information storage means capable of storing the timing information acquired by the acquisition means, and the timing information In the storage means, a time information storage control means capable of controlling the time information to be acquired from the time measuring means and stored by the acquisition means when the power is cut off; On the basis of the condition determining means that can determine whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and if the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time information storage control means A game characterized by comprising an initial value determination means for determining an initial value of the counting means based on the time information stored in the time information storage means and the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means. Machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the count value is updated by the counting means at every predetermined cycle based on the power being turned on, and the effect mode displayed by the display control means is changed to the specific effect mode based on the count value of the count means. Whether or not to switch is determined by the effect switching determination means. Then, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means is acquired by the acquisition means, and the timekeeping information acquired by the acquisition means is stored in the timekeeping information storage means. Further, the time information storage control means controls the time information storage means to acquire and store the time information from the time means by the acquisition means when the power is cut off. Here, based on the power-on, whether the predetermined condition is satisfied is judged by the condition judging means, and when the condition judging means judges that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the timekeeping information storage The initial value of the counting means is determined by the initial value determining means in accordance with the timing information stored in the timing information storage means by the control means and the timing information newly acquired by the acquisition means. By doing this, if the power is turned on simultaneously for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade without satisfying the predetermined conditions, even if one gaming machine is in the power-off state, the timekeeping information is displayed. Since it is possible to specify the period during which the power is cut off from the time information stored in the storage means and the time information newly acquired by the acquisition means, the counting means based on the period during which the power is off The initial value of can be determined by the initial value determining means. Therefore, by determining the value corresponding to the count value updated by the counting means of the other gaming machine during the power-off state as the initial value, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to the specific effect mode is deviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine D1, count information based on the count value of the counting means can be stored, and count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power cut state, and in the case of the power cut state, Count information storage control means for storing count information based on the count value of the count means in the count information storage means, and the initial value determination means is that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determination means. When judged, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means, the time information stored in the time information storage means by the time information storage control means, and the acquisition means Based on the newly acquired timing information, the initial value of the counting means is determined. Machine D2.

  According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the count information based on the count value of the count means is stored by the count information storage means capable of holding the stored information even in the power-off state. Then, when the power is cut off, the count information based on the count value of the count means is stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means. Here, when the condition determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the count information stored in the count information storage means by the count information storage control means and the time information storage control. The initial value determining means determines the initial value of the counting means based on the timekeeping information stored in the timekeeping information storage means by the means and the timekeeping information newly acquired by the acquiring means. As a result, the initial value of the counting means can be determined in consideration of the count value of the counting means immediately before the power is cut off, and the count value before the power is cut off and the period when the power is off From this, the value corresponding to the count value of the counting means of the other gaming machine which has not been turned off can be accurately determined by the initial value determining means as the initial value of the counting means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the timing of switching to a specific presentation mode is deviated between the gaming machine that is in the power-off state and the gaming machine that is not in the power-off state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine D2, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value, and the value is subtracted each time the value is updated. When the value is updated after reaching the specific minimum value, the value is updated to the specific maximum value, and the initial value determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. The game machine D3, which is characterized in that, when it is determined that there is not, the specific maximum value is determined as an initial value of the counting means.

  According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the count value of the counting means can take a value between a specific minimum value and a specific maximum value. Then, the value is subtracted by the counting means each time the value is updated, and when the value is updated after the value reaches the specific minimum value, the value is updated to the specific maximum value by the counting means. Here, when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the specific maximum value is determined as the initial value of the counting means by the initial value determining means. As a result, the count value of the counting means is updated in a fixed range from a specific maximum value to a specific minimum value in a predetermined cycle, and thus becomes a specific minimum value after the count value reaches the specific maximum value. It is possible to make the time required to reach a fixed level. Therefore, when the power is turned on again while the predetermined condition is satisfied, the initial value of the count value can be easily determined by the initial value determination means based on the period of the power-off state. Further, since the time required for the count value of the counting means to complete one round is constant, the time for switching to a particular effect mode can also be constant. Therefore, the player can easily estimate the time zone in which the particular effect mode is set, so that the player can play the game aiming at the time of the specific effect mode, or conversely, the normal effect mode other than the specific effect mode. You can play games aiming at time. As described above, there is an effect that it is possible for a player having various tastes to easily recognize a time zone in which the effect mode is suitable for the taste.

  In the gaming machines D1 to D3, in the state where the effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the effect switching determination means switches to a state in which the effect is executed in a normal effect mode different from the specific effect mode. It is to determine whether or not to switch to a state in which the effect is executed in the specific effect mode in the state in which the effect is executed in the normal effect mode. When it is determined to switch to a state in which an effect is performed in an effect mode different from the mode, the display control unit includes an effect mode notification unit that notifies the display control unit of information according to the effect mode after switching. The game machine D4 is characterized by executing an effect based on the notification by the effect mode notifying means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, since the normal production mode and the specific production mode are repeated, it is possible to make the player feel a novelty each time the production mode is switched, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In the gaming machine D4, the display control means is in a state where an effect is executed in the normal effect mode, or the specific effect, based on the information according to the effect mode notified by the effect mode notifying means. A gaming machine D5, characterized in that the gaming machine D5 is provided with a state information storage unit for storing information indicating whether or not the effect is in a state of being executed.

  According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, since it is only necessary to specify the effect mode based on the information stored in the information storage means, it is not necessary for the display control means to acquire the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means to determine the present effect mode. There is an effect that the processing load of the means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D5, there is provided control means for performing control relating to the game, and the display control means specifies display type to be displayed for a command received from the control means from a plurality of display modes, A definition information storage unit that is provided for each of the plurality of display types and stores definition information that defines, for each screen, drawing information indicating information necessary to draw an image to be displayed in the display type; and the display identification unit. Selecting means for selecting the specified information corresponding to the display type specified by the specified information storage means from the specified information storage means, and the selecting means selects the specified information corresponding to the information stored in the state information storage means. A gaming machine D6 selected from the regulation information storage means.

  According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when executing the effect, the display control means does not judge all the image information necessary for drawing the image for each screen, but the display control means stores the specified information in the specified information storage means. Since it is only necessary to expand or transfer the image information in accordance with the above, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced and an image without any frame failure can be surely displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic E group> (memorize the time to switch to the specific effect in the storage means)
In a gaming machine having display means capable of displaying the effect mode and display control means for displaying the effect mode on the display means, it is possible to measure time even when the power supply to the game machine is cut off. Displayed by the display control means based on the timekeeping means having a storage area capable of storing the predetermined setting information, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means, and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area Effect switching determination means for determining whether to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode, condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the power-on, and condition determining means thereof. Based on the fact that it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined setting information and the timekeeping information that the timekeeping means measures whether or not to switch the effect mode to the specific effect mode. Game machine characterized by comprising a-on determining means for determining from E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the predetermined setting information is stored in the storage area of the timekeeping means capable of timing even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Then, based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area, it is determined whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to the specific effect mode. It is judged by means. Further, based on the power being turned on, the condition determining means determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, based on the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, whether or not to switch the effect mode to a specific effect mode is set by predetermined setting information and time information measured by the time measuring means. Is discriminated by the discriminating means at the time of insertion. As a result, even if the power of one of the plurality of gaming machines is cut off, the timing means having the storage area operates even after the power supply is cut off. The setting information can be retained even after the power supply is cut off. Therefore, based on the predetermined setting information, the effect switching determination means determines whether or not to switch to the specific effect mode, so that the timing at which the effect is switched to the specific effect mode may be other than when the power supply is not interrupted. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the game machine is displaced with respect to the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming machine E1, the timekeeping means includes a specific aspect notifying means for notifying the display control means when it is determined by the effect switching determination means that the effect aspect is switched to a specific effect aspect. The gaming machine E2, wherein the display control means switches the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode based on the notification by the notification means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1. That is, when the timing switching means determines that the performance switching determination means switches the performance mode to the specific performance mode, the specific mode notification means notifies the display control means. Then, based on the notification by the specific mode notifying unit, the display mode to be displayed on the display unit is switched to the specific effect mode. With this, the display control means may switch the performance mode to the specific performance mode based on the notification from the specific mode notification means. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not to switch to the specific performance mode, the timing of the timekeeping means is measured. It is not necessary to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E2, the effect switching determination means controls the effect mode displayed by the display control means on the basis of the time information counted by the time measuring means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area. It is for determining whether or not to switch to a normal effect mode, and the timing means notifies the display control means when it is determined by the effect switch judging means to switch the effect mode to a normal effect mode. A gaming machine E3, characterized in that it is provided with a normal mode notifying means, and based on the notification from the normal mode notifying means, the display control means switches the effect mode displayed on the display means to a normal effect mode. .

  The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2. That is, based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means and the predetermined setting information stored in the storage area, whether or not the effect mode displayed by the display control means is switched to the normal effect mode is effect switching determination means. It is judged by. Then, when the production switching determination means determines that the production mode is switched to the normal production mode, the timing means notifies the display control means by the normal mode notification means. Here, based on the notification by the normal mode notification means, the effect mode displayed on the display means is switched to the normal effect mode by the display control means. Accordingly, the display control means may switch the effect mode to the normal effect mode based on the notification from the normal mode notification means, and therefore, in order to determine whether or not to switch to the normal effect mode, the timekeeping of the timekeeping means is performed. It is not necessary to obtain information frequently and check the elapsed time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced.

<Characteristic F group> (Notification is made at the time set by the player)
In a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying a performance mode, a display control means for displaying the performance mode on the display means, and a clocking means capable of timing even when power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, Based on the setting means with which the player can set the setting information, the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means, and the setting information set in the setting means, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. Condition determining means for determining, and a notification mode selecting means for selecting a notification mode to be notified by the notification means based on the setting information when the condition determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine F1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F1, the setting information is set by the setting means. Then, based on the timekeeping information measured by the timekeeping means and the setting information set in the setting means, the condition determining means determines whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, when the condition determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the notification mode selecting unit selects the notification mode notified by the notification unit based on the setting information. Thus, the player who has set the setting information in the setting means can recognize that the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the notification by the notification means, so that the predetermined condition is satisfied because the player concentrates on the game. It is possible to prevent the player from continuing the game without noticing. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the display control means causes the display means to display an effect mode based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the presentation mode selected by the notification mode selection means is displayed on the display means by the display control means. As a result, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the representation mode based on the notification mode is displayed on the display unit, which is a place where the player frequently pays attention in the game, so that the player does not notice the notification. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the continuation of the game. The gaming machine F1 or F2 is provided with an erasing unit capable of erasing the setting information set by the setting unit.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting information set by the setting means is erased by the erasing means. Thus, if another player has set by the setting means, but quits the game before a predetermined condition based on the setting information is satisfied, the setting information can be erased by the erasing means. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player who plays a game with the gaming machine from being notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition based on the setting information set by the previous player is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed because the notification by the notification means interferes with the game.

  In the gaming machines F1 to F3, there is provided control means for performing control relating to the game, and the display control means is provided for each of the plurality of notification modes, and drawing that shows information necessary for drawing an image to be displayed in the notification mode. It corresponds to the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means from the specified information storage means for storing the specified information specifying the information for each screen and the plurality of specified information stored in the specified information storage means. A gaming machine F4, further comprising: a selection unit that selects specified information, wherein the display control unit executes a notification mode based on the specified information selected by the selection unit.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, when executing the effect, the display control means does not judge all the image information necessary for drawing the image for each screen, but the display control means stores the specified information in the specified information storage means. Since it is only necessary to expand or transfer the image information in accordance with the above, there is an effect that the processing load of the display control means can be reduced and an image without any frame failure can be surely displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic G group> Backing up various data to alarm area Display means capable of displaying a performance mode, display control means for displaying the performance mode on the display means, and a power-off state in which power supply to a gaming machine is cut off However, in a gaming machine having a timekeeping means capable of timing, the timekeeping means is a storage means capable of storing time information set from the outside, and an external device based on the time information stored in the storage means. A signal output means for outputting a predetermined signal, and an electric disconnection state judging means for discriminating an electric disconnection state when the voltage supplied to the gaming machine becomes a predetermined voltage value or less, and the electric disconnection state A storage control unit that stores selection information for selecting the effect mode in the storage unit based on the determination that the determination unit is in the power-off state, and the storage unit when the power-off state is restored. Remembered Based on the selection information acquisition means for acquiring the selected selection information and the signal output by the signal output means, the display control means causes the display control means to display a specific performance mode as the performance mode. A gaming machine G1 characterized by having a rendering means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the display mode is displayed on the display means by the display control means. Even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the time is kept by the time measuring means. The time information set from the outside is stored in the storage means in the time measuring means. A predetermined signal is output to the outside by the signal output means based on the time information stored in the storage means. When the voltage supplied to the gaming machine becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage value, the power cut state determination means determines that the game machine is in the power cut state. The storage control means stores the selection information for selecting the effect mode in the storage means based on the fact that the power failure state determination means determines that the power failure state. The selection information stored in the storage unit is acquired by the selection information acquisition unit when the power supply is restored. Based on the output of the signal by the signal output means, a specific effect mode is displayed on the display means as the effect mode. As a result, it is possible to configure the gaming machine while suppressing an excessive increase in the storage area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the cost increases.

  The gaming machine G1 is provided with a setting means for setting the time information in the storage means after the selection information is obtained by the selection information obtaining means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, since the time information is set in the storage means by the setting means after the selection information is acquired by the selection information acquisition means, the selection information stored when the power is cut off is displayed. The effect is that it can be set more reliably.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means on the display means, And a background image on which the identification information is dynamically displayed and a background image on which the identification information is dynamically displayed are set as the effect mode.

  The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2. That is, the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The identification information indicating the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. At least a dynamic display mode of the identification information and a background image on which the identification information is dynamically displayed are set as the presentation mode. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired early.

  In the gaming machine G3, the background image storage means in which the plurality of background images are stored, the operation means operable by the player, and one of the background image storage means based on the operation means being operated. A background image display unit that selects the background image and displays the background image on the display unit; and the storage unit determines that the state is the power-off state by the power-off state determination unit as the selection information. A gaming machine G4, characterized in that at least the information of the background image displayed in this case is stored.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3. That is, a plurality of background images are stored by the background image storage means. Based on the operation of the operation means operable by the player, one background image is selected from the background image storage means and displayed on the display means by the background image display means. As the selection information, at least the information of the background image displayed when the power failure state determination unit determines that the power failure state is stored is stored in the storage unit. As a result, since the selected background image is stored when the power is cut off, the selected background image can be identified after the power is restored. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to return to the state before power-off.

  In the gaming machine G4, the background image based on the information of the background image acquired by the selection information acquisition means is displayed on the display means, and the gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, the background image based on the information of the background image acquired by the selection information acquiring means is displayed on the display means, so that the player can see the power even after the power is restored. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that gives a feeling of strangeness.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the time information acquisition means for acquiring the time information from the timekeeping means and the time information acquired by the time information acquisition means based on the power being supplied to the gaming machine. A gaming machine G6, characterized in that the gaming machine G6 has time information determining means for determining time information set in the storage means.

  The gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5. That is, the time information is acquired by the time information acquisition means from the time measurement means based on the power supplied to the gaming machine. The time information set in the storage means is determined by the time information determining means based on the time information acquired by the time information acquiring means. Thus, by supplying electric power to the plurality of gaming machines at the same timing, it is possible to obtain the same time information from the time counting means. Therefore, since the time information is set based on the same time information, the same time information can be determined by a plurality of gaming machines. Therefore, there is an effect that effects can be synchronously executed by a plurality of gaming machines.

<Characteristic H group> Back-up of hidden probability variation Determining means for determining a satisfaction condition, storage means for storing the satisfaction condition determined by the determining means, and determination as to whether or not the satisfaction condition stored in the storage means is satisfied Condition determining means, a performance executing means for executing a specific performance based on the condition determining means determining that the satisfaction condition is satisfied, and a power-off state in which power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. However, in a gaming machine having a timekeeping means capable of timing, the timekeeping means has a holding memory means capable of holding a memory even in the power-off state, and the voltage supplied to the gaming machine is a predetermined voltage value or less. In the case of, the power failure determination means for determining the power failure state, and the holding condition in the holding storage means based on the power failure determination means determining the power failure state. To Based on the power-off control means for storing the establishment information based on the power supply to the gaming machine, the establishment information stored in the holding storage means is acquired and stored in the storage means. An initial control means, and a gaming machine H1 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the satisfaction condition determined by the determining means for determining the satisfaction condition is stored in the storage means. The condition determining means determines whether the satisfaction conditions stored in the storage means are satisfied. Based on the condition determining means determining that the satisfaction condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. Even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the time is kept by the time measuring means. In the clocking means, the storage is held by the holding storage means even when the power is cut off. When the voltage supplied to the gaming machine becomes less than or equal to a predetermined voltage value, the power failure determination means determines that the game machine is in a power failure state. Based on the fact that the power failure determination means determines that the power is off, the hold information is stored in the holding storage means by the power failure control means. Based on the power supply to the gaming machine, the establishment information stored in the holding storage means is acquired by the initial control means and stored in the storage means. Accordingly, the satisfaction condition determined before the power failure can be stored even during the power failure, so that the state before the power failure can be restored when the power is restored. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is initialized due to the power interruption.

  The gaming machine J1 has a main control means for executing the control of the game and a sub control means for executing the control of the game according to a control signal from the main control means, and the sub control means has the deciding means. However, the determining means of the sub-control means determines the establishment condition based on the lottery signal, the gaming machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. In the determining means included in the sub-control means, the satisfaction condition is determined by the determining means included in the sub-control means based on the lottery signal. As a result, even after the power is cut off, it is possible for the sub control unit to hold the established condition that is not determined by the main control unit, and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power cut.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and, when a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, gives an advantageous privilege game to a player. And a state determination unit that determines whether to set a special game state in which the game state after the privilege game is executed, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal time, is provided. Means, when the special game state is determined by the state determination means, determines a formation condition that informs the player that the special game state is set. Machine H3.

  The gaming machine H3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2. That is, the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. When a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The state determination means determines whether or not to set a special game state in which the game state after the privilege game is executed is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state. When the special game state is determined by the state determining unit, the determining unit determines the establishment condition for notifying the player that the special game state is set. Thus, the condition for notification that is determined before the power is turned off can be held even during the power is turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is disadvantaged due to the power interruption.

  In the gaming machine H3, the display control means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means on the display means, and the satisfaction condition is that the dynamic display of the identification information is started. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being set by the number of times.

  According to the gaming machine H4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3. That is, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. The satisfaction condition is set by the number of times the dynamic display of the identification information is started. As a result, the notification can be delayed until the dynamic display is executed the number of times set in the satisfaction condition. Therefore, it is possible to expect the player to be in the special game state and execute the game. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the power interruption control means, when the power interruption determination means determines that it is in the power interruption state, game information including the establishment information in the holding storage means. Is stored in a predetermined priority order, the gaming machine H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the power interruption control means includes the establishment information in the holding storage means when the power interruption determination means determines that the game machine is in the power interruption state. Since the game information is stored in a predetermined priority order by the power interruption control means, more important game information can be surely held. Therefore, there is an effect that defects due to power interruption can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H5, the power interruption control means stores specific information after all the game information is stored in the holding storage means, and the initial control means stores the specific information in the holding storage means. The game machine H6 is characterized by avoiding storing the establishment information stored in the holding storage means in the storage means when the information of No. is not stored.

  According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5. That is, the power interruption control means stores all the game information in the holding storage means, and then the specific information is stored by the power interruption control means. When the specific information is not stored in the storage unit, the initial control unit avoids storing the establishment information stored in the storage unit in the storage unit. This makes it possible to determine whether the game information is not completely stored when the power is turned off, by determining whether the specific information is stored. Therefore, when the information is not completely stored, the establishment information is not stored in the storage unit, and thus there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the establishment information that may be erroneous from being set at the time of restoration after the power failure.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G6, H1 to H6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G6, H1 to H6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is operated at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data to be written on the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F4, G1 to G6, H1 to H6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a game machine that controls a game according to a control signal from the main control device and the main control device, a game machine in which conditions and the like for which a slave control device executes an effect are determined based on the content determined by the main control device. Has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-198033).
However, in such a gaming machine, when the power is cut off, the setting of the game is initialized in the sub-control device, so that the player is set by the setting of the effect to be executed when the power is supplied and returned. There was a risk of giving a feeling of strangeness.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing defects caused by power interruption.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a determination means for determining a satisfaction condition, a storage means for storing the satisfaction condition determined by the determination means, and the satisfaction stored in the storage means. Condition determination means for determining whether a condition is satisfied, production execution means for executing a specific production based on the condition determination means determining that the satisfaction condition is satisfied, and power supply to the gaming machine. And a time keeping means capable of keeping time even in a power cut state, and the time keeping means has a holding storage means capable of holding a memory even in the power cut state, and a voltage supplied to the gaming machine is When the voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, the power failure determination means determines that the power failure state is present, and based on the power failure determination means determining the power failure state, the holding storage means Based on the above conditions Based on the power-off control means for storing the established information and the power supply to the gaming machine, the establishment information stored in the holding storage means is acquired and initially stored in the storage means. And a control means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, main control means for executing the control of the game, and sub-control means for executing the control of the game in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. The sub-control means has the deciding means, and the deciding means of the sub-control means decides the satisfaction condition based on the lottery signal.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, based on the establishment of the lottery condition, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery, and a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means. In the case of, a privilege giving means for giving a bonus game advantageous to the player, and whether or not to set a special game state in which the game state after the bonus game is executed is more advantageous to the player than usual And a state deciding means for deciding the special gaming state, wherein the deciding means informs the player that the special gaming state is set when the special gaming state is decided by the state deciding means. It is the one that determines the satisfaction conditions.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the establishment condition determined by the determining unit that determines the establishment condition is stored in the storage unit. The condition determining means determines whether the satisfaction conditions stored in the storage means are satisfied. Based on the condition determining means determining that the satisfaction condition is satisfied, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. Even when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the time is kept by the time measuring means.
In the clocking means, the storage is held by the holding storage means even when the power is cut off. When the voltage supplied to the gaming machine becomes less than or equal to a predetermined voltage value, the power failure determination means determines that the game machine is in a power failure state. Based on the fact that the power failure determination means determines that the power is off, the hold information is stored in the holding storage means by the power failure control means. Based on the power supply to the gaming machine, the establishment information stored in the holding storage means is acquired by the initial control means and stored in the storage means.
Accordingly, the satisfaction condition determined before the power failure can be stored even during the power failure, so that the state before the power failure can be restored when the power is restored. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game is initialized due to the power interruption.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the control of the game is executed by the main control means. The control of the game is executed by the sub control means in accordance with the control signal from the main control means. In the determining means included in the sub-control means, the satisfaction condition is determined by the determining means included in the sub-control means based on the lottery signal.
As a result, even after the power is cut off, it is possible for the sub control unit to hold the established condition that is not determined by the main control unit, and it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power cut.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. When a predetermined lottery result is drawn by the lottery means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. The state determination means determines whether or not to set a special game state in which the game state after the privilege game is executed is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state. When the special game state is determined by the state determining unit, the determining unit determines the establishment condition for notifying the player that the special game state is set.
Thus, the condition for notification that is determined before the power is turned off can be held even during the power is turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is disadvantaged due to the power interruption.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 main control means 113 voice lamp control means (slave control means)
262 Timing device ( holding storage means)
352b Input time storage area (holding storage means)
352c Elapsed time counter (update means)
S212 Part of state setting means S302 Lottery means S1004 Privilege giving means S1211 Second control means S1317 First control means

Claims (2)

Specifying means for specifying the satisfaction condition,
Storage means for storing information according to the satisfaction condition specified by the specifying means,
And have use the information in accordance with the established conditions stored in the storage means, and condition determining means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Based on the condition determining unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, a performance executing unit that executes a specific performance,
Update means capable of updating the counter value,
The updated counter value in power interruption state in which power supply is cut off is configured not easily cleared, in the gaming machine having a holding memory means capable of retaining stored information even in the power interruption state,
When the voltage supplied to the Yu technique machine is equal to or less than a predetermined voltage value, a power failure determining means for determining that said power interruption state,
By the power interruption discriminating means on the basis that it is determined that the power interruption state, the first control means capable of controlling the so that information corresponding to the satisfied condition in the holding memory means is stored,
Based on that power is supplied to the gaming machine, and a second control means capable of executing a specific control for controlling a so that predetermined information stored in said storage means,
Operation means that can be operated by the operator,
An operation determination means for determining the operation content of the operation means,
The second control means is
Based on that the determination result of the operation determination means is the first determination result related to the specific operation from the time when power is supplied to the gaming machine until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Te, first the specific control information stored in the holding memory means controls the so that stored in the storage unit, information is the storage means in accordance with the satisfied condition newly specified by said specifying means And a second specific control for controlling so as to be stored in
Based on that the determination result of the operation determination means is a determination result different from the first determination result during the period from when power is supplied to the gaming machine until the specific condition is satisfied, The second specific control is configured to be executable as the specific control,
After the said specific condition is satisfied, the gaming machine characterized that you have been configured to perform the specified control is suppressed. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured to be playable using a predetermined game medium.

Images